Blog

Introduction                              Book one and two summary                 

 

PAGE  5       CHAPTER ONE          The Black Feet

 

PAGE 15      CHAPTER TWO         Celebrations in the village

 

PAGE 39      CHAPTER THREE       Adams first journey

 

PAGE 58      CHAPTER FOUR        Dropping into California

 

PAGE 77      CHAPTER FIVE         Hiding in the forest

PAGE 112    CHAPTER SIX           Enjoying the fruits of life

 

Great Eagle Book Three

Book, one opens after Dan traveled from Boston on the East Coast and heading toward the Pacific Ocean on the West Coast in the year of 1842. 

Our story follows the movements of Daniel Adam David Soloman as he was christened by his mother. Dan, as called by friends, traveled West after selling his family farm and his photography studio, which included the property obtained while working that business. 

Traveling along Dan faced those strangers that had watched him sale the things he owned. His travels led to encounters with those wanting to profit from his personal possessions and the first book explains those encounters. It is not necessary to read the first book to watch Dan control each situation and those desiring harm before reading book two or this book for the same reason you do not need to get comfortable reading this one it is just more fun that way.

In the first book, Dan meets a princess from the Paiute Indian Nation after spending days traveling and sharing meals with the tribe. The friendship, education, and love he gains are important, but you don’t need to read the previous books to understand his journey. While events in his past were educational, they served mainly as relaxation history. If you haven’t read the first two books, you will still learn about Dan’s possessions and friends without missing out on how he acquired them. 

Dan travels West and lives with the Piute Indians in the Nevada region West of Elko and East of Reno along the Truckee River. Dan is married to Mary who is a true princess with the ability of sightings into the future. Mary is pregnant now, and they are living with her Utes while waiting for the birth of Adam, their first son. Mary had told Dan that he would have a son for each of the names his mother had given to him at birth. Adam being the first middle name so naturally he is expecting without a doubt it will be a boy.

It was only a little strange that Dan had three friendly Mountain Lions (Eeny, Meeny, and Miny) finding after the mother died. He raised them from birth and had taught them each how to sit when told, to roar when told, and each had the ability to understand instructions in almost any language. The wet deer used her milk to nurse the young kittens grew to accept the kittens. Dans horse Shadow and the grey wolf Nuzzle had taken much longer to adjust to becoming friends with an enemy, but time heals the worst memories.

 

CHAPTER ONE

 

The black feet

 

Our story begins at the breakfast fire beside the Truckee River on Piute lands. When ten to twenty of the villagers are gathered around the fire pit every morning wanting to learn more about the white man’s God. This morning, unlike other days in the past, there was an uneasy sensation in the movements around the fire pit. Everyone seemed to have an ear toward the North. Those who were in the middle of a conversation stopped and were listening to something not understanding what was happening. Eeny, Meeny and Miny (Dans pet cougars) were growling and watching toward the North moving back and forth nervously. Nuzzle (Dans pet timber wolf) came running into camp barking, growling and the hair on his back was standing on end showing his readiness to fight. 

Mary ran out of the Teepee wanting to know what the problem was. All could hear shouting and yelling from a distance and the excitement was growing. The fear in the air was felt without the knowledge of why. I just held up my finger showing that we should listen. 

The awareness came like a rolling thunderstorm. I started yelling we are being attacked! Prepare everyone to fight. Mary, please help me get the Raven kite ready for immediate flight. Shadow was out in the meadow and as I yelled, she ran for camp. 

We must get the Raven ready for flight and not the Eagle. I had two kites however I felt the Eagle would not put fear in the enemy as the Raven would. I feel we must show them it was a bad omen. Fast Mary, we have little time. Nuzzle takes the cats to the edge of camp and protect us as we prepared for take-off, which was unnecessary as they were naturally born to protect us. Do not let anyone into our camp. 

As I pulled the kite behind Shadow and was aligning the kite the screaming and howling of those attacking became louder and the sound of fighting became closer. Noise from the guns, women screaming while running grabbing children. One Indian came into my side vision as I had leaned down to hook the rope. Turning and raising from a kneeling position I came up and under his arms   and I just shoved against the warrior’s chest. Falling backwards the warrior tripped over the rocks surrounding the fire pit and fell into the fire on his back. Sparks flew and the fire at once took hold of the man’s hair, but I was so busy hooking up the kite I lost track of the hand-to-hand fighting around me. I knew without looking that Mary had been firing a gun and was thankful having spent the time teaching her the use of my guns.

The sounds of the cats screaming, the wolf snarling, the warrior screams from the attacking animals were loud and boisterous. With all the fighting going on I managed to get the kite hooked to Shadow and managed to concentrate well enough to shout run Shadow run and as instructed many of times she started moving till she felt the rope tighten then without further word took off with increased speed till I was no longer running and sat back in kite. I could hear and see all the noise, screaming, fighting, guns and arrows, the sounds of battle, the kite was air born. Just barely off the ground and Indians with horses were trying to shoot me as I left the ground the thing that saved me was, they could not get close to me because on each side was a mountain lion running along beside of me. The horses were in no way getting close and they fought the riders throwing them, bucking, and pulling away. One rider who forced his horse got ready to shoot me with an arow and Meeny took him right off the back of the horse. The other warriors showing fear were getting away from me to avoid the fierce mountain lions.  I looked back over my shoulder as I left them behind seeing them running away from the meadow. Just as I released the rope holding me to Shadow. The kite lifted and as if God himself had a hand on it. As I gained speed the kite became stable, and the air lift was maximum giving me great visibility as only a morning in the mountains can.

Tuning as I climbed, I saw the Indians coming over the hill by the hundreds heading for our village. I knew that if something did not change, we would lose our village and our friends this morning. With a small tilt to one side, I headed toward the crest of the hill and leveled the wings as I got closer. The mass of fighters was coming over the top and heading down hill extremely fast and having practiced the call of the Raven I screamed. The men stopped and looked me in the eye, and I thought they would pour their rath at me and to my astonishment they stood still and just staired at me.

With the strange Raven overhead, the screaming of the bird directly at them, those who had been running toward the village stopped and looked up. The Raven was a sign of death and those watching and hearing turned and ran as fast as they could away from me. Men were jumping bushes, running into trees, and falling. The impact of what was happening became total chaos. Those that saw this great bird attacking and screaming dropped everything they had and ran away. It was unbelievable to those who saw it and the fighters that fell from the excitement created more confusion which gained as the fear grew. Some were on their hands and knees holding arms over head with hands outstretched as if I were a God to be feared. Those in the front fighting in the village become aware of those retreating and the fear spread throughout the mass. I continued to circle and scream at them.

 I finally flew back over to the camp wanting to know that Mary and those in his camp were safe. When close enough to those on the ground I waved and Mary was standing with a cat on each side and Nuzzle was not visible nor was one of the cats, but I had a feeling that all was well, and I continued to fly past. I turned toward the direction the Crows had come from which made me flying up the mountain. With the slope of the mountain and my dropping in elevation it would become an easy landing. All the time during the fight I knew the attack had been from Black Feet. 

Looking again toward the distant line of retreating Indians that were still leaving I once again felt the deep fear of those villagers that could have died or been injured during all the fighting. 

After watching the Indians, I continued lowering at a slow pace toward the meadow where I started from. Lining up with the center and leaning to the front of the kite l slowed my kite and I glided into a meadow full of cheering, shouting friends. I did not even get my feet on the ground before I was taken in the arms of so many, I could not touch the ground.

For a moment there I was afraid the crowd was in danger of my protective cats but like Nuzzle they had grown accustomed to these people and accepted them to crowd around me.

After arriving at the Chief’s fire pit, which is where all the celebrations for the village were held. I was allowed to stand on my own feet and the yelling and screaming, shoving, and patting on the back type of thing had finally slowed down and the noise level was with in a speak able point the Chief held his hands toward everyone to show he wanted to speak.

As Chief of all the warriors and villagers of this great nation I hereby call a celebration to be held to award our newest member and his family our greatest honor we can for his devotion and willingness to face the enemy and drive away those that would do us harm. I say we shall start right now and continue for five moons. Right now, I would like to have Great Eagle speak and tell us what is on his heart.

Thank you, Chief Crazy Horse. I have something to share with those who will listen.

 I am like all of you, I eat meat, I drink water, I wear clothes. I get up in the morning and I go to sleep at night just like all of you I am not different in any way that you can think of. What has happened here is not because I have something in me that you do not have, so I want all to understand that what allowed the fear to enter the enemy was not from me but from a supernatural thing. All that happened because I allowed him to help us. He did not help us because we desired it, he helped us because we had faith and just let him guide us. Do you understand that I am telling you do not look at what has happened as something that I personally did all that I accomplished was because we ask the great spirit to help us.  I will celebrate with you but understand I am not celebrating what I did but what the great spirit did, and I call the great spirit God. He is not white man’s God he is all men’s God so with that understanding I will join you in celebrating our united victory.

Because of Dans humility and prayers of the Great Spirit the hole tribe was so humbled by his demeanor that they took him into their hearts and minds as a member of their tribe and the love they showed upon his was beyond anything Dan or Mary had ever saw. 

Later when Dan was alone with Mary, he told her, we had always been taught that the Indians were a barbaric people with no understanding or knowledge. Yet they understood what I told them and accepted it and had I made that same speech in front of a crowd of my own people few would understand, and few would care. God made me for a purpose and the more trails I travel the clearer I can see the trail laid out for me.

I noticed that one cat was missing when I was about to land is all well Mary. Eeny had been hit with an arrow in the hind leg and I had to take it out, which was a real problem holding him with all his anger. I had to have help, but he understood and finally allowed me to help him and now he is growing healthy. 

Another thing I must tell you of was while I was flying over the Black Feet, I had the most beautiful Eagle flying beside me and it was as if he was watching what I was doing. You remember the Eagle nest in the top of that tree that I took his food several times. Yes, Mary said I also remember the time you got to close and hooked the kite in the tree and tumbled down like a rock in the grass. We were lucky those that found you took you and cared for you. Was it luck or the hand of God? 

My travels have taken me many moons from my home in the East, and I have never doubted that I will one day arrive at the land in the West with the great ocean and along with that faith I have found you, which some could say is luck. I laugh at that as I laugh at what we think is luck. Some think we make our own luck but then some think that what is luck is a supernatural accordance that we can have the ability to vary the direction it turns out. 

The Chief has given us a large home that I am proud of, but I would like to be moved to the edge of the village where our furry friends can come and go without passing so many people. Dan, they put us here for our protection and to be close to all the villagers. As to protection with three mountain Lions and a grey wolf sleeping in our home could you imagine what would happen to anyone that would try to enter with our permission? 

      

 

   

 

      

 

I had not forgotten that so many have come by each morning to hear me speak of the Great Spirit and to ask their questions, now I mention it I would not like to stop that, and I would miss the smiles and warm wishes that come. Maybe I should not be so hasty in wanting to move there is not much time left of the day by the time we share our morning meal and have our spiritual discussions. I can imagine the number of people who will attend now that we have taken to the air and put fear in the enemy. I bet it will be many of moons before the Black Feet will attempt to attack this village again.

Mary, have you an idea of the amount of time before you bring Adam into our home? Why are you anxious for the little one? That is a fact, but I also look forward to traveling again and seeing what lays ahead. Look up there it is the Eagle again; he is watching us. Dan, you think there is only one Eagle in the world. Mary, I think that there are many more Eagles in the world but there is only one that watches over us and I think it is the one we had a hand it feeding. It’s fact now I say it the word more makes me think of Moe and with Eeny, Meeny, Miny what could we possibly name the next friend but Moe. 

Nuzzle, I would like you to catch a rabbit and put it out in the middle of the meadow on that stump we use as a landing mark. You three cats are not to spend time close by that for fear you will scare Moe from taking that rabbit as a meal offering from us. When we leave this village, he may travel with us, and he could be eyes in the ski to warn us of approaching danger. 

When I came out of my teepee to start the fire as usual it was already burning bright. I looked up and Ange was smiling at me. I gave her this name not being able to remember the given Indian name. It turns out that when I gave them a name which seemed to fit and a name, I could remember they were proud and held that name dear to them.  Ange was my aunt’s name, and this gal was small and looked like my aunt, so the name was easy for me to remember. So how is it Ange, you are up so early and already have my fire going.

Great Eagle, you saved many of us from losing our village and our lives, which is very important to me and others, so this is nothing to repay a small amount of goodness in return for that. I do have a double reason though if you would answer my question before everyone shows up and takes all your time. First please do not feel that your question is any less important than anyone else’s and I would be happy to answer it if I can. I would only ask this of you knowing you will answer it honestly. Would your God accept me and treat my family as he does yours with us not being white? My God is color blind he loves all and calls them his children. How do I learn more of him? You keep coming to my fire each morning and you will learn as others have been learning and as long as we are here, we will teach you and all.

This was a normal morning and the same questions as before were ask again in a different way and I spent many happy hours talking and teaching on Christianity. I was not a minister, preacher or anything that gave me authority, but I found the more I talked with these people the closer we became as friends and that was as important to both Mary and me.

I had discussed this very subject with Mary for several reasons she was an Indian and she had ask the same of me when we first spent time together but what I found is the Indians had a very deep believe in a supreme being in fact more so on the average than many from back home. I had found no one so far that did not believe in a spirit or something of that nature which made me wonder why without the written words passed from one generation to the next, how they all had this undeniable belief. I keep reminding myself they are supposed to be the heathen the uneducated ones.

After our little meetings each morning and as I have told Mary if I were to leave and sneak out to hunt for the day and not attend, they would feel I had broken some rule that said I had to do this it became so big a deal in fact I had days when there were over fifty who attended. Back home they would have passed the plate asking for donations and here they brought things without my asking and there was so much stuff that I am wondering what I will do with it when I leave. 

Tonight was a special occasion because the Chief and all the counsel had invited us to the main counsel fire for an award he said. I had learned to speak their language and that helped in our relationship. I had no idea what he was going to give to me, but I was still excited to be the guest of honor for whatever reason as long as I was not to be tied to a pole and burnt. 

Mary told me we had a full month before the little one would join us so I did not want to leave the village till after the baby was born and then I felt it may take a few more days to make sure all was well. What I mean by that is I would like to know Adam our first born is healthy and has all he needs to grow and not have any problems. How long or how old he has to be is not something I know now but I have no doubt that I will know when the time comes. 

Every morning, I would go to the fire pit outside and shortly after breakfast I would open the discussion to spiritly conversations. The questions they ask are the direction I would take the teachings. Many of the time the same question was asked in a different way, but many were the same and each time it was received by those in attendance as if it were the first time and they enjoyed hearing it. The hunger for the spoken word was obvious by the attention of those attending and the number of those that attended. Each morning it seemed as though more and more were joining us. And by the size of the crowd that was true.

The questions that Mary and I had were answered at night when we would gather at the main firepit for the tribe and that was in front of the chief’s teepee. The Piute had many chiefs, and each had a particular job or position to full fill. Among those of position in the tribe was the medicine men or woman as the case may be. Many women were gifted in knowing which plants to use for what illness. I was amazed to learn that around this area were over one hundred and twenty plants that could be used for anything from illness to fix the body to fill the belly for hunger. It was just a matter of knowing which plant did what and they had those that did nothing all day long except find and prepare those plants for use later on.

A medicine man had a lot more standing in the tribe that a doctor did back home. A doctor back home went to school for many years depending on what he was going to do such as skill in operation and that also depended on the part to be operated on but say a heart specialist he could spend up to twenty years studying and preparing for this ability. The medicine man started as a young boy/girl, and they would be trained from childhood and their whole live was devoted to learning and knowing. Some students were sent to other villages where a “healer” was known to be very good and effective so the student would travel and live with that healer and teach the students and this could be for many moons at a time. So, to think the Indians did not know would be a big mistake. And also, spiritual awareness was taken very seriously and most of the time it was not a choice but a demand of a child.

Tribal chiefs came in many different positions because the Indians held to a ranking of the chiefs depending on a war chief who had to have been in battle and proved his value where there were young boys who would do anything they could to prove they were worthy of being a warrior. So, positions in the tribe were earned and practiced continually.

The closer the day came for Mary to bring our new member of the family into being the more women came by our teepee to make sure all was ready and that we had certain things that were necessary for the new member. Mary was not allowed to carry her washing to the river to wash that was taken care of by others and the washing was also completed by friends and family. Toward the last few days, they would not let Marry fix dinner or anything that could cause her to have a physical drain. 

The men would spend most of the time hunting or preparing to hunt or fight. Bows and arrows were being built all the time by someone in the village. When you walked though you could see the arrows being worked on or the knives being built but I don’t believe I ever saw a man just setting and doing nothing. All had a job to do,                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     and they never stopped, lying in the sun as many from back home would do.

As the day worn on Mary became more reluctant to move about and to spend much time just visiting with neighbors and family. I believe the time draws near, she told Dan. What can I do Dan says I no little compared to the healers who are waiting to attend to you. Will you be at my side Dan I am scared that something may happen that I know nothing about. I would think that as important as this is, if you were in danger or if there was something you should know it would be revealed to you at this time. That is what I am afraid of what if. Dan took Mary by the shoulders in surprise and said do not continue with those thoughts. I would want you to think of our newest family member and how we should be prepared to welcome him into the world. We are going to be proud parents that are waiting for this new family member, and doubt is not part of this family. So, stop that type of thinking and start with a warm and friendly smile waiting on him. I will help you into the blankets that have been prepared for this very special occasion and maybe I should send brown fox to let the ladies who await the great event to come and set with you for a little while you gather your thoughts and try to relax and enjoy the last moments of the little one sharing your belly. Dan, the pain is more than I could ever imagine, even my back is hurting.

Brown Fox thank you for stopping by to check on us and yes, we need you to go tell Roben and the rest of those in her camp that the moment draws near and Mary could use the advice of those women.  Chief Iron Hand came to the opening of the tent and leaning in asked if they thought the time was near the little one would make his appearance. Grass hoper came to the entrance and said I have checked her, and she is part way into the delivery now so yes this is the time. With that Chief Iron Hand said I will send runners back to the village of her fathers and let them know that a new member of their family is about to arrive. Chief Yogi of the Ute tribe will know of this before the new moon arrives. With that he turned and left returning to the official community fire pit and ask that there be built a fire even though it was not dark nor cold he wanted everyone to know of this special event.  

Mary’s pain was causing her to want to scream and yell but her status as a princess would not allow her to do as she wanted so she held her tongue and did not cry out as expected at this time.  The three cats would not be forced away from Mary and Dan was called to assist in removing the animals, so the women were free to move about. Upon entering the tent Dan pointed to each cat and with just hand signals each cat got up and followed Dan out of the tent. That is a relief if ever there was one White Water said to Grasshopper. The women were busy making sure Mary was comfortable and they had water heating, extra bladders of water were hanging outside the entrance, and pots were on the outside fire heating water and inside the ladies were laying out cloth to be used as necessary. Because of Mary being a princess, she was given a ritual to the Paiute Tribe, and many were sending smoke signals to the heavens, others were sounding drums, even youngsters were pounding sticks together making noise to let the God be aware of something important happing in their village.         

Afternoon became evening and evening became nighttime and as the hours drew on the excitement in the village grew accordingly. As the moon appeared, through the curtain of clouds and just over the mountain the cry of the little one could be heard by all and at the moment the wolves in the forest the cats at the fire pit started to howl and Nuzzle leaned back and putting his mouth to the heavens declared the new one to be here. The cheering and yelling went on for a long time, but Dan was not disturbed by it, he was a very proud father. Later when ask about all the animals making the noise they did was that not a surprise to you Dan.   I never even thought about it Dan said we have been living with this mixture of birds and animals so long we just accept things the way they are.   One thing is for sure Adam will never be short of a protector or be lonesome with all that is waiting for him.      

Adams birth brought something I had never considered, Mary’s mother was a healer and a princess of the highest order. Her father was chief for years and was known as one of the greatest leaders of all time. Mary was known as a princess, but she did not tell Dan because she saw into the future and knew he was to be her man and when he was on the way to her village, she knew it and watched his movements toward her. She never had doubt that he was coming for her so when he showed she did not want to scare him or give him any reason to doubt why he should not be her man. Some would not accept the responsibility of having a princess of a nation as big and strong as the Utes so she did not play this part as much as most would have. Now that Adam was born, he became a high-ranking member of the family tree and with that he had honors that members of the tribe wanted to bestow upon him.  

For many tribes in the area having another member of royalty join was something to celebrate and the chiefs of many tribes meet in the ceremonial area to unite the Ute nation of all tribes and the Piute together that such a man was a member of this supreme leadership, and his birth should be acknowledged by all. It was decided that the next full moon would be the timer, and the celebration should continue until the moon had been divided in half. 

Hunters would be bringing meat for this great even and the women would be making decorations, gifts for Adam and the warriors would be entering contests to decide who was the greatest to be the protector of Adam for the rest of his life. When someone of this birthright is born everyone is humbled and feels this is a token given from the great creator and as such all should be made aware of his birth. The village grew so big that Dan found his Teepee again in the middle of the village. He liked to be on the outskirts so the animals could be free to enter the woods without disturbing neighbors.

The tribal leaders felt that because of Dans unlimited ability of helping with fighting the enemy and his searching for the locations of those necessary to feed the people they wanted to use this time to also welcome him and let all know that he was a chief of the tribe and was to have all honors that all great men of the Piute Nation. Never in the history had anyone ever heard of a Whiteman having this position. Secrete warriors of the nation were called together and as a group of special warriors’ part of the ceremonial dance would be used to install Dan into a leadership position of this group. 

With all the celebrations gatherings of visitors and preparations for the celebrations going on no one paid any attention to another visitor from the territorial governor who was in the process of signing a treaty with the Piute Nation whereby they would be moving them to a reservation. The treaty was important to the white man but to the Indians it was obvious that the Piute’s were stronger than the white man and they only wanted the treaty because they felt they were weaker than the nation of Piute’s and to be included is the Utes.

Freeman was the name of the Whiteman who was trying to get a counsel of this tribe to gather to sign a treaty. Dan did not know the significance of this treaty or that he would play such a big role in it. The excitement grew as the celebrations began, and Freemont found little attention to him and he found that others did not care that he was a representative of the Government. The stories that were told to him about Dan’s ability to fly and his animal kingdom that supported him was more than Freemont could understand. He knew that Indians had a different culture and looked upon the great creator in a different way than the white man but to actually believe that a man could fly was taken with a knowledge that people create folk lore in all sociates. So, this was a joke to him and he thought they would acknowledge the fact it was not possible to fly so he just waited for the celebration to come to an end. 

Freeman was watching the dancing and listening to the drums pounding away and to him this was very annoying. Mary had several lady friends who had begged and begged for the chance to help tend to little Adam so it was not a big surprise to anyone when Mary would appear and dance and take part is the celebrations. As she was on her way past the ceremonial tent which was the largest in all of the village and where many of the festivities took place Freeman stopped her and wanted to know how long these confounded drums were going to continue. Well as she spoke to Freeman she did not address him as mister or any title she did not see him as anything but another visitor to her village and found no reason to give honor to this stranger. These confounded drums as you call them are part of our lives they are talking to the great spirits in the heavens and they are announcing the ritual that our people have done for many generations. And as a stranger to our village, you would not have knowledge of the power and voice the drums play so I will not speak to you as a fool I will address you as a stranger and I will tell you that it would be wise for you to learn about these confounded drums and the dancing in step in order to drive the sound into the earth and the Gods below. Those drums are very important to our people so if you are to learn or want to learn I would suggest that you tune your  ears to accept those sounds as a voice of our people talking to those spirits and try to understand that you are very lucky to be able to hear them and if you would care to take part in the celebration not only would you find it to warm the heart it will also lead you to further knowledge of our Gods that oversee this celebration. Freeman stood with his mouth open he had never heard a woman address a man with such knowledge such forcefulness. Watching Mary Walk off left Him with an admiration of not only her but the admiration of the drums and there meaning. She had opened his mind to the possibility of knowledge from somewhere he had not known he was lacking.

Freeman watched the ladies bring Adam out of a special teepee that he had not even paid attention to. Now that he looked he saw many colors painted on the bottom but as it got to the top the colors seemed to flow into the very hide incapsulating the posts. He keep looking and the decorations were all handmade with every one of them without ever being told he knew they were there for religious reasons. How had he know this? Such workman ship from people who have only the very basics of life to work from. As he looked he found the drums had been quieted down and he turned to look and they were pounding them just like they had been. The fact he had been drawn away mentally showed him that perhaps there is more to the hole ceremony than he had even considered. Noticing many going to the meadow just beyond the ceremonial area he saw many fires burning and all seemed to be watching Dan and Mary as they held little Adam up. Drawing closer he could hear as Dan was speaking to the people.

His grandmother the great Chipeta most respected wife of Chief Ouray of our nation told of him before he was born. Mary’s great-grandfather Bold Eagle the most famous of all leaders of our nation told of his name before he was born. I am Great Eagle honorary chief of our nation and hold him before you as proof of his beginning. Before his journey through life, I say to you that as his mother, grandmother, and his grandfather the most respected warrior Chief Ouray have told of him.  He will make you proud. As Dan lowered Adam the crowd began to yell and the drums which had be silenced while he spoke began to sound again. Men were pounding rocks against trees, logs and anything they could to make noise. The chanting of Adam, Adam had started and was now heard throughout the village. 

 

As Dan walked along the line of people that were showing him with praises and pounding on his shoulders and back to the point you would think he would be in pain by all the fuss being shown to him. At the end of the line Freeman was waiting to ask Dan how his mother, Grandmother and Grandfather could possibly tell of the boy years before he was born. Smiling Dan told him when I first came to Mary I had no idea that what you say could have been possible but Mary has told me of how many sons I will have and has told me of my daughter and I have learned that what we know is of little value. The great one in the heavens know and I have without a doubt became a believer in what they say.

Do they know how the treaty will end between us in the future? I have not ask but I would advise them to turn their backs on you and not sign or believe anything our government says to these people. What? you would go against your very beginnings and side with these uneducated and illiterate people? Uneducated, illiterate by your standards not by those of the world that can read the trails of every animal on earth. If left alone they will feed their own and not cause any harm to this world. You are the ones wanting what they have it is you that is forcing them to fight. Freemont you and all who are like you have a very narrow vision of the outcome that will change the lives of many just so a few can have what they want. The uneducated are those that have not the knowledge to see what the most obvious thing in the world is. And what would that be Dan, Freemont ask. That your greed and hunger for what others have is causing much harm in the world on both sides. 

I understand that you are putting together a lot of people and they are going to walk from the Southern States across the Mississippi River in the winter most having nothing to ware on their feet and in the middle of winter. Not just one family, not just a few you are moving thousands of people from the Cherokee, Choctaw, Chickasaw, and the Seminole to just name a few of the tribes you are moving thousands of miles. You tell me of education and illiteracy and are in the process of wiping out tens of thousands of people and all because of white man’s hunger for riches. The tears that shall flow in many great nations shall be remembered for ever because of this greed. Freeman I could never tell an enemy let alone a trusted family to even consider what you have come here to discuss with my wife’s relatives. If you want my friendship you will get on your horse and go back and tell all that the Piutes are not as dumb as you thought they were and try to persuade them to reconsider and find another way to solve the problem of riches by way of murder. The Cherokee was lied to and now they die by the trailside with frozen feet. Talk not to me about education and illiterate anymore. And with that Dan turned and joined those in the crowd. 

 

By morning all was quiet and calm with fires burning low, the smell of dying fires and smoke lingering. Dan pushed aside the flap and stood outside the teepee as a runner for the tribe approached him and told him. Dan the chief is having a special counsel this afternoon to meet with Freeman and discuss his treaty. Go back to the chief and tell him I am honored and proud to have gave such an honor but I believe the treaty to be another hollow drum of the white mans. I shall take no part in voice or presence at the meeting. If I were chief I would send Freeman home without his tongue. Then turning continued on into the brushes brushing against Nuzzle his timber wolf friend. 

Returning to find Mary out front of their home preparing a meal for the morning. Good morning my sweet princess said Dan as he walked up. I was told you refused to give counsel in the Chiefs gathering yesterday. That is right, I do not feel what the white man is saying is worthy of giving anytime to the subject. Did you tell the Chief this? Yes I sent word back with Little Wolf when he ask me to join them and told him my feelings. You do know that to not attend when ask if an insult to the Chief. If he should send word when I was ill would I be forgiven? Yes you would be. If you were ill and I was attending to you would I be forgiven? Yes Dan you would be forgiven for that also. Then perhaps you can see that when ask to attend to something I cannot accept makes me sick. We will speak no more of this now, Mary said. 

Venison fried to a light red floating with wild mushrooms and wild onions was set before Dan as he sat down with a third cup of coffee. You know you are the best cook of all the princess I know. I believe I am the only princess you know.  Then what I said has to be as all other things I say no doubt. What is that which you are building up to say this morning Mary. The thing we came to this village was to bring Adam into our world which we have done. We have gave him the blessings of his ancestors and our God. Is there another reason why we should linger here. Not that I can think of now, let us dwell on the subject a day or two and we will imagine our journey which will bring to light anything else we should do here. 

At counsel the chiefs were told of Daniels words and the fact that he was preparing to leave the village was brought before the counsel and murmuring was so strong the chief had to stop for a few minutes until order could be maintained. No one would dare speak out loud when not addressed by the chief but it was obvious that many disagreed with what was being said. Before continuing the chief stood and held his right hand up and out toward all in attendance and said listen to me my brothers as most can see Great Eagle has a loud voice with our people and before we continue I would ask Grey Fox to go ask Great Eagle if he would please come to our counsel and explain to us his feelings. Later upon entering the group Dan started to set at his place where he would normally be positioned for a meeting and the chief stopped him. Great Eagle you have many brothers here who would hear what you have to say on this treaty the white man is offering. What I would say most would not want to hear. Please Great Eagle speak as you would from the breast and with the knowledge many of us here do not share. 

All in attendance know of my heritage and know I was raised among the white man and my blood is from that birth but my heart is among those of you and I have no desire to place distance between what we have now by voicing my words. I know you want me to speak anyway so I will say this. The white man has many soldiers, many hand full of hundreds of warriors who could come into this village and in moments destroy everything. Not only do they have many people they have weapons you have never saw. They have guns that shoot bullets big as the rocks around this firepit. They have guns so big they have to move them on wheels one at a time. When an enemy is so much larger and stronger than us to fight them would not be a question in my mind that outcome would be to lose all of you in a heartbeat. What I say, what you say has very little value to them they will do as they desire and they will not hold to what they say in the future. You are doing the only thing possible hearing what they have to say and hoping they offer much because you have no voice that will be heard. The outcome of this will be as the white man says so I with a heavy heart do not want to hear this they offer. 

I will answer any questions that you may desire of me. The questions were few as they were ask but with one question another was added then that brought more questions and those made more and the meeting lasted for hours and hours. Dan felt worn down to total exhaustion when it was finally over. 

Returning to his camp he feel into the robes and just lay looking at the nothing. What is it Dan what has got you so tired and in a land of another. I hated doing what I had to do Mary it was not good for me to have to tell others that they had no chance and life would be over for them as they know it. We will leave as soon as we are prepared to travel. 

 

CHAPTER THREE

 

ADAMS FIRST JOURNEY

 

After a week of preparations Mary brought the three cats to her side and said we will leave today and you three shall be our advance protection against any who would want to harm us. You can leave now and stay one days travel ahead of us then after circling the campfire you can join us for our final meal of the day. Should you need anything or want to tell us anything do not return use Nozzle to let us know. We will be traveling many miles and many days so prepare for a long journey. 

The cats sprang to life but went into a different direction than that which Mary had indicated for them to go. Unknown to Mary Dan had been in the meadow getting horses ready to leave and as he bent to pick up a large pack to put onto Buster four men stepped before him and surrounded him each having a weapon prepared to use if Dan should resist. Tom the leader of the men said in a very meaningful way that they were here to show Dan the errors of his ways in not accepting the warnings that Freemont had tried to instill in Dan. You have no idea the power or the scope of people that feel you need discipline because of your lofty ways. And just what do you think you are capable of teaching me. 

As Tom started to raise the sword he had in his right hand he felt the sharpness of teeth upon his wrist. He looked down and a Miney, Dans pet lion which had Tom in a grip that let him know that he was about to lose his hand. Seeing this, Wendle tried to raise his spear to stick the cat that held Tom, and he found he could not raise it and looking down looked into the eyes of Meany who had a firm grip on the spear and was growling at him. Tom became aware of another cat just setting and snarling at them and to make it worse he suddenly realized the Large Grey Wolf with teeth showing the hair on the wolf was standing on end and the stance of the wolf left no doubt of his ability to attack. The others, with Tom, stood in silence afraid to move or speak. Shadow Dans horse was directly behind those facing Dan and as they suddenly realized they also had a horse showing teeth which is rare to say the least. Fred looked at Tom and said I think we are undermanned here Tom even his horses are ready to fight. At that moment a great white-headed Eagle landed on Dans shoulder and was watching the men. The growling of the cats and the snarling of Nuzzle snarling and juices running down his mouth and the stamping of the horses behind the men was the only sounds to be heard. 

Dan just stood and smiling at the men told in a voice of much command for the cats to allow the men to not move but should they it would be ok to let them know they were facing death. Now gentlemen let me explain something that is not taught in the schools that you had attended. Not only are you in danger from us you have been in danger sense leaving the fort. Had you been able to do to me what you had intended but you would not have made it back to your camp. These are not just our friends they are family and Mary here has more influence than just this tribe. It would take you a month to get outside of those that would go to war with your government and all your armies had you been able to do this thing you were never capable of doing. 

Now that you have been made aware of your weakness and stupidity I would ask each of you to drop your weapons and strip to the last garment on your body.  Jack started to say I will not take and about that time Nuzzle moved up to him and with a very deep chested growl stood in front of him and he stopped what he was saying and began to disrobe. Why would you do this to us Tom asked? As a white man you use paper and pen to send information I send you back and will not have to explain anything you will do it for me. When you pass each of those that will see you will know of your ignorance and laugh and ridicule you which will remain in your memory for ever. 

Up on joining Mary Dan said, “I know that you had to know the danger I was facing and you allowed to happen without a warning why?” Well, when I told the cats to go one direction and they went another direction I stopped and thought of what you would be facing and I was about as worried for you as I would be if a squirrel should attack Nuzzle. Why should I worry about those that are not capable of holding on to their own clothing. And I also smiled when I watched those men try to walk without sandals. You have sent a strong signal to the white man with your strange behavior Dan.

Loading of the camp and took only small amount of time and Adam was laughing and enjoying the whole thing like he had saw it many times before. Each of the horses feel into line as they left the small meadow and the day travel began at a very leisurely pace. 

At the end of fifteen miles Dan ask Mary to send Moe out and see if he could find a good campsite for them for the night. Dan could get Moe to do many things for an Eagle but he was not sure he would understand this one and knew that in a few days that also would be taken care of just by repeating it over the next few days.

The start of each journey is slow in getting adjusted to life on the move. Each night only that which is necessary is unpacked. It is all unloaded relieving the burden on each animal but the packs were left in a line as they were taken from each animal so the next morning they would line up and Dan would load each in a turn and the time necessary to be ready was short. 

Evenings were enjoyed around the campfire by all and even Moe would land close by and seemed to like the closeness of this small group. Adam was busy as usual with the things that keep a small child entertained so he became a joy for all to watch him as he discovered another small treasure that could be from a shining rock to pinecone. Food was still backed in bags should they be needed but mostly coffee, salt, pepper and flour were used daily and they were keep in one place and loaded and unloaded many times. 

Nuzzle would bring rabbits, squirrels and other small game but it was not unusual for one of the cats to drag something of a larger size into camp on occasion.  Deere were plentiful and that was often left by the trail when Dan would stop and load parts as he came upon them. The group worked as a team and all seemed to know when something was necessary and it would be waiting for them alongside the trail.  After climbing the Sierra mountains and winding along the river to the great lake in the sky that had been told about they agreed to spend a little extra time fishing and just resting.

The first night Dan was amazed when he pulled in some trout over 20 lbs. such size he had never saw before it was a thing for him and he found the fish to be extremely tender and tasteful for such a big fish. He decided that it had to be because of the extremely cold water and it was so pure they drank right from the lake.

Dan remembered the story that had been told of Kit Carson finding this lake and going back East and telling those that there was this lake up in the ski that was so big you could barely see across it and it was above the clouds and the fish were up to fifty pounds. They knew him to be one to string a story to the point of breaking it but this was not even considered to be true. Talk as he did could not make others believe what he had found. The lake became known as Lake Tahoe after having been called Bigler the native Indians just referred to it as da’aw without any other words necessary to indicate the body of water. The Washo Language simplified and mispronounced their version of Washoe word da’aw or da ow and ga.

They all agreed after one month that if they were not on the trail again before long that at this high elevation the winter would come soon and it would be a hard one to live in.  So, after gathering extra food supplies they were ready to move and Mary told Dan it is a good thing because they were just about out of most things they needed. They followed the river North out of the basin and when it turned East again they left the river and began the descended into the valleys and meadows and the trail dropped so fast that it was only a few days before they were in warm weather and evenings were so warm a blanket was not necessary. 

Dan approached a trading post and was asked many questions as to what they had saw and how the Indians had treated them and how they managed with such a small boy. By now Adam had begun to walk and was talking a little but his words were not as those in the trading post expected he spoke somewhere between Piute and English. One word would be traded of another depending on what he was trying to say. One thing became evident no one was getting close to that boy without either a cat or timber wolf protecting him. It took some talking for Dan to convince them that the cats were a pet and could be trusted. No one had ever heard of a pet cougar and top that off with three and with a pet Timber Wolf then throw in an Eagle and no one would ever imagine that this was one family tied together with the love of the world. 

Dan I am told that as we drop down in elevation the weather gets even warmer and there is water most of the way to the ocean. Ezera has told me of many of those that live only to kill and steal what others have. He said it would be wise if we were to travel with others and not take any chances. Yes Dan said but how do we explain all of our fury friends to these people who has never saw a cougar or a Timber Wolf. Mrs. Harmer would not be able to control herself if she saw Nuzzle let alone Eenie, Meenie, Miney or Moe. And if all of them were approach the Harmers wagon together, I think the smell would be really bad.  Even the animals would not want to smell what the Harmers would spread as they ran. Well, I don’t expect to face that problem anytime soon so we will not look for that problem right now. We will load up on the necessary supplies and when we have loaded them away as we feel is necessary we can move on down the hill and get started on our way. Mary I almost forgot I want to get more fishing line the last I had is getting weak from age. I am told there are some good-sized rivers down the way we are going and I would like to take advantage of them. Is there anything that you have missed that you would like to get while we are here Mary? No, I can think of nothing they have that I desire to have but maybe a few trinkets to trade when we find some of our friends along the way.

I must tell you Dan about those men you went outside to visit with just a little while ago. Yes, Mary what do you know? I see that have many bad things about to happen with them. They are working with more men and they are going to take this trading post away and use it for their own profits. They intend on killing everyone in this village so no one will know what has happened. When will they do this Mary? They wait for us to leave so that when we get to next trading post we will tell of everything being as it must be here. How far away must we be before they feel we are on our way. They have a man waiting two days travel from here to wait and watch for us. He will then return and tell of our departure and that will begin the slaughter of those here. Well, that’s an easy answer I will just tell Ron Johnston of their plans and they will be ready. They are prepared for that also if we should say anything that would cause Ron or anyone at the trading post to show alarm they have men ready to kill all of our friends the three cats, Nuzzle our wolf friend even our horses and they speak of Moe our friendly Eagle as possibly needing shot. They have many men ready to move and take over.

 

Maybe Mary we should ride over to see Yonger our Indian chief in the little meadow and ask him for his help. They have many men that would be very happy to take a few scalps from the white man. That is the wrong direction for us to travel and when we started toward the little meadow they would suspect what we were doing and could start sooner. That cannot be the answer either Dan. You must think of another way to talk with Yonger. We will put off leaving for one day while I think this further and perhaps ask my father for his guidance. We can tell them we are not ready to go and that we must have more preparations for Adam. I could offer another if it would help Dan. What is that Princess? I am with child again and could use a few days of rest. Why did you not tell me of this? I was waiting for the right moment when we could share our joy but this could now be that moment.  

After a day of laying around and doing nothing Dan finally concluded that he must leave as they expect them to and then when they have passed the man on the trail two days travel they will make camp and make all things look as they should be. After the man leaves to return to here I will take kite to meadow and will return to Chief Yonger and drop a message in his camp telling of their plans. Can Yonger read white man’s words? Mary ask. No, but that is not a problem I can use the same type of signal they use when sending smoke signals. Also, I can use the same hand signals we use when standing before him and need to speak most Indians can speak different languages because of these hand signals that are common. 

I will take the runner who is sent to watch us two days to return to village and I can travel over the mountain in two or three hours I will talk and tell of the attack days before it happens and all can be ready.

We shall leave at sunrise and be on our way. I will bring all together tonight and let them know and we can load before the sunrises and be ready to leave. Go stay your goodbyes tonight and let all know we will return when 

God allows it.

As they were leaving those that would come along to see them and be with them on their parting trip. Started but they dropped off as the sun got higher in the ski. By early afternoon Mary and Dan were well on their way and had sent Moe to watch from the ski and Nuzzle to check for a place to spend the night. Nuzzle came to Dan and was indicating someone was following them. Do not bother with them he told Nuzzle I want them to follow so stay away from them. This seemed to satisfy Nuzzle so he just laid down by the fire and went to sleep. 

Mary had told all three cats and the Eagle to watch for a meadow where Dan could make flight with his kite. Moe was circling and came to Mary landing beside her as she was preparing the evening meal. What is it Moe she ask? Moe would hop and lay one wing over then hop and lay the other wing over which indicated to Mary that Moe was talking about the kite and Dans flight. Yes Mary said to Moe he would be going up when we find the meadow long enough to do this. Moe jumped over to Nuzzle and though enemies before they were now friends and Moe poked Nuzzle on the nose and looking up Nuzzle leaned his head from one side to the other looking at Moe. Moe turned and took to flight then sat back down and came back to Nuzzle and again turned and hoped and took to flight. As Moe left the ground Nuzzle was behind him running and following Moe. Dan smiled and said Moe has found the meadow and he is taking Nuzzle to see and we will know which direction we are to travel in the morning.

Dan are you sure you can travel that far that fast? It will not matter because I can beat whoever is to run and tell that I am returning. Now you mention it I could have Nuzzle make a visit to his camp and cause him to be held up for a day or so if I should decide. Dan could you not just go to his camp and tell him that you are going on and make him believe and then fly. Mary if I were to do that I would have to lie and I have never lied in my life. Dan you talk much just answer me yes or no have you ever lied. Silence. Well Dan are you going to answer me? Mary you want a yes or no and if I say yes that is a lie and if I say no that also is a lie. Please explain to me Dan. Well Mary I have told things that turned out to be wrong was that not a lie. But you did not lie on purpose. Now you know why I could not answer you with simple yes or no. Much more information is necessary sometimes that is why I take so many words.

I have been thinking on talking with Moe our Eagle friend and ask him to fly with you every time to go up. Why would you think that necessary Mary? Well Dan every time you take off I get a little feeling in my stomach and I know you will be ok but I cannot help but feel concern for you.

To be honest with you I get a little nervous just before leaving the ground but when I get into the air and flying like a bird I feel the emotion changes to one of awareness and excitement that overrides the fear I felt. We will spend more time teaching you how to do the same thing then it would be exciting to fly together and enjoy together that, which is so special.  

That’s OK Dan I will still speak with Moe and he will know that it is my wish he travel with you and if we should fly together he will fly with both of us. Mary is it because you are a princess that you can speak to Moe and he understands or is it as when I speak to him I think he understands me but I never know till he does that which I have ask. Oh, he lets me know Dan when he understands and he will sometimes turn his back on me when he does not want to do that which I have ask of him. I have had the ability to speak with many animals in my life so Moe is not exception or any different for me. My friends when I grew up were of many different kinds. My mother got very angry with me when I insisted a skunk spend the night with me. I just cannot understand some things Mary what a childhood you must have had.

That night was spent putting together the kite for the next day’s flight. Attaching the rope and lining up Shadow for takeoff the next morning was easy and tireless the wind was blowing up the canyon so it gave lift fast and before I knew it I was above the trees and making a small gradual turn to return to the trading post. I was not a bit concerned about who was on the way to let them know I was out of the area and gone. On the ground the wind was getting very strong I could tell that by the way the trees swayed and the branches bounced from the wind. In the air the wind is not a factor because the strength of the wind was between the wind and the ground and if you are not on the ground what effect that has only matters when in opposition to your flight path.

As I approached the trading post I could tell that many were busy moving boxes of what I could not tell from this distance. I decided that I should not get to close for fear of them seeing me and knowing what I was there to accomplish. So, I moved downhill far enough that I felt they would not know I had passed and I flew right on by.

I was following a trail that had been used so many times in the past that I appeared to be a wagon road from the air. I could see the village a long ways away and I turned a small amount and sailed right to them. As I drew near I saw those that at first saw me then I could see and hear the excitement of those that first saw me approaching. They were yelling and screaming and pointing to me.

More people looked up and stopped what they were doing and holding their hand over the eyes shielding out the sunlight on their faces. I turned and dropped lower so that when I went over the camp I would be able to signal to the chief and those that would be watching what was about to happen. Chief Yonger waved as I approached sense he knew me and I had told him of my ability to fly and. So, he knew I had this ability and he was waving franticly at me. As I approached him I gave him the signal for enemy and an attach was on the way. He was signaling how many and from what direction they were coming. I did not have time to answer that but went over several teepees and beyond the horse heard that was grazing by the river. Turning downhill, I was again flying into the wind so with the mountain dropping away and the wind lifting me I gained a lot of height in a hurry so turning back to camp I again lowered so as to come close enough to make signals with my hands. This time I indicated that it was not this location that was in danger but the trading post. Knowing the trading post was a very important to these people because they traded and got supplies there. This time over there were more standing and watching and most knew the hand signals and were giving me back thank you and letting me know they understood. 

This time as I flew over I was heading in the direction I wanted to go to return so I just gained what was necessary to be over mountain top and continued back and around trading post again. It was still early afternoon when I approached the meadow and could see Mary, Eenie, Meeny, Miny and Nuzzle all watching me as I approached. Moe our Eagle friend who had followed me everywhere I had gone was still on my right side as I approached the meadow I saw him land beside those that were waiting for me.

We got the kite secured and taken apart enough the wind had not effect but I noticed it was not blowing as hard as it had been earlier. Mary turned to me and ask if I had contacted Yonger and the people. Yes I told her of their excitement when I came over their camp and the number of people who were signaling to me and thanking me. Do you think they will stop the attack on the trading post Mary ask. With out a doubt they will because they depend upon those food supplies such as floor, salt and sugar so you can count on them getting to the post and they will stop any foolishness that those men would try to create. 

So, we can continue on our journey and not worry about that any longer. That will make me very happy to not and I will think about what is to come before us. The cats did not want to leave the meadow and laid watching the sky to see your return. They wanted to see you and they did not go hunt our supper tonight so we may not have any fresh meat. We still have time would you send them again and I will talk to Nuzzle and see if he can help with a little something. 

That sounds good let us take all this and return to our camp and we can start the fire and get things done. Dan do you think it will be a problem of starting in the morning? No Mary that sounds like the thing to do now we have been here several days now and it is time to move on. It will take us another ten days or so to reach the next trading post so getting started is a good idea.

 

CHAPTER FOUR

 

DROPPING DOWN INTO CALIFORNIA

 

I will send Eeny to spot for us this morning Dan said. Oh, you think now you know which is Eeny and which is Meeny do you. Of course, I do Mary I have always known to tell them apart. Well then maybe you don’t know a male from a female because I remember once when you said Eeny was a male then you said female I did not say anything but now I find you confusing to say the least. The days of not knowing is a lot easier now that Eeny is so much bigger than either of his sisters. I thought I may have to do like those friends I had back home that could not tell their horses apart. The cut the tail off so they could tell which was which and that worked until the tail grew back. So, then they cut the mane off and that did it for a while but that grew back so they decided to measure them and see which was the tallest. It turned out the white horse was two inches higher than the black one. Dan why do you spend time telling these stupid stories. Because you love to hear them that is why. Where do you think Teyah our friendly female deere who was such a great mother and gave her milk so that the three cats could live. A deere is more of a sticker to one place they usually never travel over a few miles from where they are born. When hunted they will run around the mountain but most times will end up back where they were found. She no doubt stayed where she was happy and if we should go back through there I will bet we will find her again. I am glad you do not suspect harm to her Dan. Mary you are the one who sees all this stuff why could you not find this answer within you. I do not know all Dan I only receive that which is necessary most of the time. Like I could see and hear what those men were going to do at the trading post but I do not know what happened after we left. When we get to the next post we will without a doubt hear of that so all we have to do is be patient. 

Dan will we have the money to buy what things are needed on our travels. Mary have you forgotten the gold we found in the cave back there. We have enough with us to buy the trading post and fifty more just like it. Money will never be our problem so do not even think about that. I just do not want to use it if I do not need to because that will spread that we have gold and that will bring us problems we do not need. I am trying to figure out how I can spend it and not put us in danger. 

I think I would like to stop somewhere and not have to cook or load or unload anything for a few days if we can find the right spot Dan. As we drop down into the valley we will find several small villages and one of those may have what would be our best opportunity to meet our most basic needs. I have heard of a place called Hang town that may offer us a cabin and some friends that will assist us in our daily chores. What will we do with our friends Dan what would they say to having three grown mountain lions running around the house. I can make them understand Nuzzle because he can be so friendly they will think of him as a dog. I would never be able to get him to not be at my side he has been there his whole life and I would never try to change that. 

Mary if we can continue at the pace we have set I believe we can make it to that little village in one more day. How do you know this Dan? Nuzzel has warned me we have in front of us many people and that would be Hang Town. That is a bad name for a town I wonder where they got that from. No doubt in my mind they had to have hung so many people they got the name from it. Every town has something about the name that would indicate its source. Some are named after a man and that would be easy to figure out and just the same presidents, and famous people have been chosen for the name. 

Let us make camp here by the side of this stream and we can continue on in the morning and I will send Nuzzel to find how far it is to the village. Just a moment Moe Mary said very loudly. She raised her arm and spoke again Moe and out of the tree not noticed before was Moe waiting for his dinner. Tell me how far to the next village she said. Moe took off and was gone in a flash. Mary Dan said do you think he understood you. Wait and watch what happens now. In less than time than it took the water to come to a boil Moe was back and was standing on the edge of the pack used for traveling. Moe spread his wings and as Mary counted he raised and lowered his wings showing Mary how many times he had to flap to get to the village. Are you shore that is what he is telling you. Dan are you stupid or just not paying attention. I don’t know how far he goes on one flap but I know he is telling me that so tomorrow when we get to town we can figure out and know for the next time. Seven flaps is not very much so the town must be close. 

Hello the camp was heard and the three lions were already in the bushes and Nuzzel had moved over next to Mary. Come on in if you are friendly if you are not be prepared to be friendly. As he stepped out of the darkness which was just beginning a very tall man holding a rifle by the barrel set the stock on the ground and as he did a small woman shorter than Mary came behind the man. Sticking out his hand to Dan he said my name is Sam what be yours. And Dan told him his name and said this is my wife Mary. 

What brings you to my camp Dan asks. Well young feller he says I have been hunting a very large man that has been seen in the woods here and I was wondering if you had saw him. Is he bigger than you? Oh yes I am like 6 feet four and he is way over my head. I just saw him at a distance but the Indians were chasing him and I could not get close enough to shoot him. Why do you want to shoot him? Dan asks. He could be dangerous as big as he is. You want to kill someone because of his size? That makes no sense to me. Well, it does not matter to me what you think but I would like to be the one to take him to town and brag about me being the one to find and kill him.  Well Sam I do not hold to what you think is important we live our lives trying to help not hurt others. So maybe it would be better if you were to leave our camp and not return if you live like that. I will go and do as I please it matters not what you say I am too much for you to mess with. 

With that Dan held up three fingers and the mountain lions appeared beside the man and Nuzzel moved over closer to Dan and the hair on his back started to raise showing his concern for the man. Now Dan said what was that you were trying to say about size. These are your pets. No, they are my family and you are about to find your size has little value here. Maybe we should look at you like you are talking about the other big man you spoke of. Maybe we should kill you and we can take your body in and hang it in the town square and let others look upon you as you would have them do. No please allow me to leave and I will not be back. Let me explain so you will understand that if you continue to chase that big man for the reasons you say there will be very little chance we do not meet again and if I meet you again I cannot promise that my friends here will look at you with kindness in mind. I would suggest that you find how you got here and follow those footsteps right back where they started and stay there if you want to live to get bigger. 

As Sam left the fire and was heading away Mary said to Dan do you think he will take your warnings? With that Dan held up three fingers and pointed at the man and gave the indication they should follow the man and at the same time Mary said and make sure he leaves the mountain. With that you could hear the screaming of the lions as they chased Sam. That should make him understand his size has not much value here. 

The cats and Nuzzel returned much later and all set around the campfire and enjoyed an evening meal and containment was obvious to all. Even Moe dropped in and was watching as Dan through him a large piece of meat which he took and that is unusual because most Eagles would never take a handout from a person they only took what they had got. It is so nice when we can all join and enjoy the stillness that the forest offers. 

 

The next morning as Mary was setting food around on the stumps that were arranged around the area for tables she was not smiling as would be expected. What is the problem my princess you do not look happy today. I have a dark cloud in my mind and I do not know why I feel as I do and I cannot see a reason for it. With that Moe sweep down out of the ski and was squawking and waving his wings and jumping around and flapping while squawking.

That is what was bothering me this morning now I know. What is it princess? The man they hunt is up on the mountain and in very much pain. They have him where he is in danger of his life. How do you know this? All things have a voice if we hear, I did not listen or I would have known before. When you say all do you mean that plants also speak. Oh yes Dan they have many voices if we just listen. How do you do this Mary how can you stand to have all these voices and not drive you crazy hearing them. When you go to villages and many people are speaking how can you stand this? I also have ability to shut off that which I do not want to hear. But I have to be careful because just like the giant up on the mountain I did not listen but you have to go help him. We have to stop this chatter and you must take your kite up and rescue him. 

 

Mary what are you suggesting. The man is on top of the mountain and he is in great danger because he is injured and cannot run or hide. So, you will have to fly up there and pick him up and take him out of danger. Mary I do not know if I can do this how will I land and take off with him. Dan why must you land why can he not take ahold of you when you come over him. Mary this what you ask has never been done before and when he grabs my kite the extra weight could force me to crash. I do not know if the kite will support two of us. Well don’t take the water or the coats or the guns or the bullets and all the other stuff you usually have. If you do not take that stuff the kite should be able to take more than just you. What you are suggesting is possible to get me killed. OH, Dan you worry about stuff that is not necessary I have looked at the future and know you will return in good health so stop this chatter and prepare to fly.

Can you talk with him Mary? Yes I can and he knows you are going to be coming for him. Is he on the top where he can get to a cliff overlooking the valley. I will tell him that you want him on the side next to the cliff. Mary is it possible for me to learn to talk with him. All it takes Dan is concentrate on him and in your mind say what you want him to know and he will answer you. I will try it but we must hook up Shadow as fast as we can. I have put the Eagle kite together because it is much larger than the crow. I will circle and see if I can find where he is and then I can decide what is necessary. Moe are do you know where this man is? Yes he indicates by a nod of the head. Take me to him then Dan says as he lifts the kite on his shoulders and yells lets go Shadow.

For Shadow this is just another day of pulling the kite so she now just takes off. When Dan gets above the trees he heads out into the valley trying to gain what elevation he can as fast as he cannot knowing where the man will be. Moe fly’s to the side of Dan and turns toward the East and uphill so Dan follows Moe and he must be on the correct side of the mountain to give him lift because he is over the mountain in a hurry. As he turns and looks he sees many warriors side by side and facing the top of the mountain. Dan knows what they are doing and he goes over the top and watches for the giant. Circling and watching Dan sees Moe land on a tree branch and when he sees this he can see the man crouched down in the bushes on the edge of the cliff. The opening beside the bushes is just what Dan is hoping for and he fly’s down and crosses the open ground and as he does the man hobbles out to the edge and Dan is just barely over the ground as he passes the edge and is out away from the mountain. He is so busy watching he did not see the man hook on to the kite but he felt that pressure on his legs from the man hanging under him holding onto the ropes that Dan is setting on. In only a fraction of time Dan is out over the valley and away from the cliff. He now looks down at this man who is very large and he is very hairy even his face has much hair. The arms of this man are as large as Dans legs. This is truly a big man to say the least with him below Dan he cannot see him only his face and arms so looking what he is doing he decides the best thing he can do is get this thing onto the ground before something goes wrong. Turning toward the meadow where he knows Mary is he turns and starts to drop toward the camp. As he passes over the lake beside the camp he feels the giant let go and cannot see him but knows he must have fell into the lake. With the loss of weight, the kite is able to climb just enough to make a smooth turn and he heads toward the camp. 

 

When Dan lands he is all alone in the meadow and he looks toward the lake and he can see Mary helping this man up onto the back of Shadow. Amazing Dan thinks never has anyone ever been able to get onto Shadow and this guy is riding him back to the camp. Dropping the kite and climbing out from under it Dan heads to the camp to see what he can do to help. 

Nozzle is running around the man and jumping up and down like he is an old friend. The three cats are just standing and now they are laying down just as if this is an everyday occurrence. How can this man be so welcomed into his camp to fast is what Dan is thinking. As Dan arrives the giant is just setting on the log facing the fire pit and he is larger than any man Dan has ever saw and he has never been told of anyone this large. The guy must be over nine feet tall. Walking up the guy nods his head and without opening his mouth Dan knows he has just been thanked for saving him.

 

Blood is on the ground under the leg of the man so Dan grabs a rage from the top of the saddle pack and leans down to stop the bleeding. As he looks closer he can see a hole in the back of his leg and the blood is seeping out. Dan wraps the rag around the leg and ties it stopping the flow of blood. It may not be stopped completely he tells Mary but it should slow it way down. Mary pulls a buffalo robe over and lays it on the ground and tells the giant to lay on the on his stomach so she can look at the wound. Somehow the grunts and whistles are making sense to Dan he can understand part of what the guy is saying to Mary.

 

First Mary would like to know what name this fellow goes by. Ooga (sounds like oh-ga) is what it sounds like so that is what I will call him. Concentrating on him I find I can get imaginary thoughts at least that is the way can understand what is taking place here. Mary is right when she tells me to just not try so hard just let my mind be free and somehow the information is translated to me. I think I can read what he is saying Mary. He has just told me that he was a long way away from the man we called Sam and as he turned to go into the bushes he was hurt really bad in the leg and he fell and the leg would not work and he says with the pain he could not become hidden. I do not understand if he can move why he could not be hid Mary. 

 

Dan there are those like Ooga here who live in the forest and they have a way of disappearing from our eyes. I do not fully understand it but they have a way of just blending into whatever is near. It is like they become invisible to us all at once. That is there way of protecting themselves from others. As a child they are taught by their parents how to do this and all who like him have this ability. So, when he was hurt it took something away from him and he was not able to do this. That’s right Dan he says he lost it and even now he says he can’t do it because of the pain in his leg. 

As Mary was speaking to Dan she was pushing the hair aside so she could see the hole in the back of his leg. As she touched it he moved and grunted apparently it hurt him when she touched it. Dan I think the bullet is still in there and it has to come out so I am going to need some hot water and a sharp knife to remove this. Does he understand what is about to happen? Oh, he knows but this is new to him he is trusting me to do what is necessary. 

 

Mary put the knife into the flames of the fire and got it hot then she waited a minute for it to cool and while she did this Ooga laid back and he looked like he had gone to sleep his eyes closed and his head just king of relaxed as he was laying on the side of his face I could not see as much as I would have liked to but it appeared as though he just went to sleep. Mary pushed the knife into the hole and as she did she said I can feel it right here it did not go very deep. His skin is like a buffalo he has very thick hid and with all this hair and perhaps as far away as Sam was the bullet did not have much power by the time it got to Ooga. Anyway, I need another knife to hold the bullet against this knife. Turning Dan reached into his shoulder bag and got a small knife and handed it to Mary. This would be perfect she said and with that using both hands it was only a minute and she had the bullet laying on the blanket beside Ooga. When she did this she then made the blood run allowing any infection to be washed out. How did you learn how to do this Mary. Dan do you think as a little girl I did not learn anything? We teach all young children many things as they grow so they will be prepared to face many hardships in life. 

 

Ooga turned and was about to get up when Mary put her hand against his chest and pushed him back onto the bed. No, she said verbally this has to have something to stop the blood flow I will tie it so it will not bleed. As she was speaking she was tying a rag around his leg just above the knee. When she was finished Ooga just looked at Mary and with a nod of his head he had said thank you to her.  You will not be able to walk for a few days you will have to lay still and let the leg mend so get use to laying on that bed and do not worry we have many friends here that will keep others from harming you. Nuzzle began to howl and pretty soon I could hear others answer him and I knew for sure that Nuzzle had ask for a few friends to help secure this area and keep others from coming to our camp.

 

Ooga turned out to be just like all men who are hurt he wanted more attention than I had expected from him. I had to bring him lots and lots of water never in my life had anyone drank so much water as he did. She found he enjoyed roots and berries and because of the time of year we had many available to us. I filled my hat many times and he would put his hand into my hat and it took only moments and the hat was empty. 

 

After a few days of laying around I thought he would try to get up and move but he was content just lying there letting us feed him and bring water to him. Finally, after ten days or so I brought back a bag of berries and he was not in his bed I turned to Mary and ask where did he go. She laughed and said he was laying right there where he had always been. I looked again and said no he is not there Mary he has gone somewhere. About that time Ooga appeared just as he had been before but now I could see him. Mary has the ability to disappear now so does that mean he is well. No Dan he still cannot walk but he is strong enough to change as he just did. No wonder nobody can find these guys they hide right in front of you. I have heard stories of these big men in the redwoods of California for years but I just figured that it was more baloney than fact. 

After two weeks of care Ooga got up and limped over to the side of the fire pit where he took up the bucket I had for water and drank the bucket dry. During his stay I had learned that I could tell what he was thinking and knew whatever he wanted me to know. We sat around the fire pit many nights and the cats enjoyed him; they would lay beside him and even put their heads on his legs when they could. Nuzzle would just lay and watch him it was amazing to see how he had become a part of our family.

 

You know Mary that if I were to tell my friends back home that I had a princess for a wife, a horse that would fight for me a timber wolf and three mountain lions and a pet Eagle they would not believe a word I said after telling them all of this.

 

Which brings to mind I was just thinking about our new visitor Sam and was wondering if he had left the mountain or if he was still wanting to shoot Ooga just for the fun of it. Perhaps we should send Moe out and see if he can find Sam and then we would know if he left after my warning or not. Giving a loud whistle and screaming like and Eagle Ooga looked up wondering what was going on. Mary turned to him and told him what Dan had said and Ooga just shook his head. 

 

Dropping out of the ski and landing on a low branch beside the fire pit Moe just stood and look around like what had they wanted. Mary looked at Moe and said aloud do you remember who Sam is? Moe raised and lowered his head in indication that he knew. Have you saw him lately she ask? No was Moes response to that. We were wondering if you would see if you can find him we want to know if he left the mountain or not. In answer Moe just took off and was out of sight in a few moments. Dan then gave a nod to Nuzzel and said go find the cats and tell them what we want and spread the word that if he is anywhere around here we want to know. With that Nozzle took off and Mary just sat down beside Dan and putting her hand on his arm said what would you do if he is still here Dan.

 

Before I can do anything I would like to know that Ooga can walk and move as he should be able to. Ooga looked up and stood up but as he did you could see it was a job for him to get onto his feet. Well, that answer that we will just have to wait a little longer until you can function properly Ooga. What is it you would have me do Dan? We have been together so long now that I do not know if I read what you say or if you are speaking out loud to me. Why would I bother to speak out loud to you Dan that would be a waste of my energy. 

 

CHAPTER FIVE

 

Hiding in the forest

 

I have been doing a lot of thinking on this subject and it bothers me to think that someone can just decide to shoot something or someone and it not have consequences. Perhaps he learned his lesson and has left the mountain as you told him to do Mary said. Somehow I cannot picture in my mind him doing anything he was told to do. We will just wait and see first if he is still here and then we can decide what is to be done to protect Ooga from getting shot again. 

 

As Mary was setting out the dinner plates Moe landed and hoped over to her. Well, is he here she asked him? Waving his wings and squawking it was obvious to all that Moe had found Sam and he was here. That does not surprise me, in the least Mary I did not think he was worried about what I had to say. While he was talking Dan walked over to the tent and got his rifle out and brought it back and laid it on the log. Moe can you pick that up? Jumping across the fire pit half flying and half jumping Moe reached down and picked up the rifle and raised it over his head. Then bringing it back down to chest level he took off holding the rifle. Bring that back here Dan said in laughter as Moe circled the camp. Moe came right back where he had gotten the rifle and leaned it against the log just as he hand found it.  Well now that we know it is not to heavy for you which does not surprise me because I once saw an Eagle try to take off with a one-month-old Holstein cow calf and he almost got it off the ground he keep trying but the calf would raise but not enough for the Eagle to fly so he had to leave it but he would have taken that calf if he could have. So, it is not surprising that a fifty-pound rifle was too much for you. 

 

Here is what I would have you do Moe. I want you to go watch Sams camp and when he sets his rifle down and walks away from it I would like you to get it and bring it to me. Do not try if he is close to the rifle just wait for him to leave it long enough you can get it. Perhaps it would be a good idea if Eeny or Meeny would go along with you just to make sure he does not try to shoot you with a different gun. If he brings out a pistol or another Nuzzle rifle I would like you to jump in and take it away and bring it to me also. For you to get the gun would be enough I would suggest you take it out where Moe can get it and he would fly it back easier than you can carry it through the trees. That is if it is a rifle if it is a pistol then you could bring it to me easy enough. 

 

First we will remove any chances that Sam will find us and shoot Ooga when we are not watching. After Ooga can walk then we will do the next things that can teach Sam a lesson to be remembered. Yes Mary the depth of a fool is darkness and the wise man sees it. He knows not what he attempted and his eyes are blinded by that darkness. Knowing nothing and caring no more is why we must bring light to his path. After we take his teeth he will begin to see the light very brightly. I may not be a wiseman but I can sure bring Sam to the light. 

 

As the days passed and Ooga’s strength returned his usefulness became visible to us. He would go into the forest and return with things to eat we had never saw before. Many times, he would have hands full of roots we had no idea of what or where they came from and Mary had spent her younger life learning all the plants and berries that one could ever encounter yet Ooga would present to her and just stand and wait for her to comment on them. He had a way about him that continually amazed us his strength and stamina was so far over anything or any human I had ever meet. Standing beside me one day he just squatted down and as I looked over he had shot passed me and was hanging from a tree limb that must have been twenty feet up. Other times he would run towards the tree and it was like he could run up the tree. He would put his foot against the tree and then take another step like a lizard would climb a tree he did not stick to it he just ran so fast that his first steps against the tree just carried him up it. His speed and stamina was way beyond mine and I do not believe I have ever saw anyone to match what he showed me. 

In the starlight we can see Sam setting around his fire pit eating a rabbit he had shot during the day. He was talking to his horse and telling him how he was going to find that big man and if he had to drag him by his heels he was going to take him to town and show the others that he had tried to tell them there were people out in the woods different than us and we should be aware of it. I set that rifle right her by you Granger now where did it go? I am sure no one walked into camp and took it so it has to be here somewhere. Perhaps I am giving you too much time by the river and you are getting lazy with that tall grass and not watching the camp like you should be.

Moe had come flying into camp that afternoon with Sams rifle and just set it on the ground beside Dans rifle and then just looked up and watched to see what anyone would say about him bringing in the rifle. Nuzzle came into camp several hours later and he had a pistol in a holster dragging the belt full of bullets. Wow Dan says you too did really well I will make sure and reward both of you for this. Ooga will be pretty safe now that Sam has no weapons. Mary looked over at Dan and said, “how many guns do you have Dan?” Oh, I would have to stop and count but you know it would be more than these two. Yes she said that is my very point we do not know for sure that he does not have more weapons the only way that we can be sure is to send Moe back and let him watch Sam and see how he gets his dinner and what other weapons he has. Then we will know for sure rather Ooga is safe or not and we cannot allow Sam to have another chance of killing him.

Ok Moe starting tomorrow morning we want you to go find a tree close enough you can watch Sam and let us know if he has more weapons. Now I would like each of you cats to get up close enough Sams horse gets nervous and starts to stamp and jump around knowing you are about. Then you can scream a few times and Moe will be up in the tree watching and that for sure will tell us if Sam has any more guns or not. 

The next day Moe took off early and before he left Dan made sure he had a good breakfast and he gave him another piece of meat to take along with him. The cats knew when Moe left what their jobs were so they took to the woods and was gone immediately. Mary, it seems we have a fairly good sense of whether Sam has more guns, and we’ll have a definite answer soon enough.

Was going to do a little fishing this morning but now I don’t think I can put my mind into it so I will just lean back and have another cup of coffee. Thirty minutes later Moe flue into camp and was dancing around like the ground was on fire standing on one leg then the other and flapping his wings all the time. Well, what have you got to report Moe don’t keep it a secret. Moe immediately flew over to Dans rifle and was picking it up and setting it down indicating Sam had another rifle. Well go back and keep an eye on him and if he tries to shoot anyone of our family come get us. With that Moe went to flight and was gone. Ooga what do you think about all this? Maybe you can offer some advice to this. Yes he let them know he could walk into the camp and bend the rifle barrel so that he could not hit a tree if he were on a limb. How can you do this and be safe Ooga? He will not be able to see me when I walk up and he knows that I am in the woods so I don’t have to worry about him telling others because we know he will anyway. Beside I would like to pinch him on the back of his leg so hard he will be days before walking.  Well, you have been out here in these woods so long it would be stupid for me to tell you what to do or how to do it so I will just follow you and be in the bushes if you should need me. 

Later that afternoon while Sam was preparing some meat to be hung over the fire pit to be smoked he looked up and that Eagle was back setting on the limb watching him. Sam said to Granger do you feel something is wrong or is it just in my mind that I smell something different. Granger shook his head up and down like yes I smell something. After living with an animal night and day for years you learn to read each other pretty plane so this tells me we have a stranger or a strange animal somewhere about here. About that time along came a skunk and it just wondered though the camp and out the other side. Sam had ran to his gun but when he saw the skunk he just sat the gun down and turned back to the fire pit. Then he heard something and turning he watched his gun that was leaning against the log just bend in half. That is not possible how can a gun setting there all by itself just fold in the middle? This makes no sense if I had not saw it happen I would not believe a gun could be made so flimsy that it just feel apart. It was as if someone came along and stepped on the middle of the thing. Ouch Sam yelled as he felt a bee had stung him on the back of the leg and he fell to the ground holding the back of his leg. Man, that hurts what was that that hit me. Sam had to crawl over to the log and could not get up onto the leg it hurt so badly.

Mary did you have anything to do with that skunk walking into that camp at exactly that moment? Well, I did promise a few eggs for his breakfast if he would just wonder through it was not like I had to beg him or anything he kind of wanted to do it anyway just to watch Sam run.  

As Sam lay on his back with his eyes closed he felt as if he had fell of a cliff and his neck hurt something awful and he had to force himself to open his eyes it’s like he had been ran over by a heard of buffalo. It took all of his ability to just force his eyes to open. The first thing he saw was the meat rack he had beside the fire pit was ripped apart and all the meat was gone. The fire was out and the coffee pot was laying in the pit flat as a squaw track; the bottom had even been bent out flat. The bladers he had for extra water was not just emptied into the fire pit they had been shredded from top to bottom. Looking around further he saw his horse Granger was gone and the rope that held him was torn in half. That horse never had the ability of breaking that rope how did that happen he wondered. Looking further he saw the stirrups to the saddle had been ripped from the saddle and lay beside the fire pit. His blankets he used for bedding had not just been torn apart they were also in ribbons ripped into shreds. His head hurt so bad he felt back and had a large knot on the top of his head. Not wonder he thought someone hit me and knocked me out. Shaking his head he looked over and his saddle bags had been ripped in half and the front was open showing that everything inside had been destroyed. He had many bullets and a power horn that was also missing. Turning his head and looking at his tarp, he had tied between two trees for a wind break and in case of rain had been torn down and it also was shredded so much it would be unusable. Oh, my what else and as he looked his bags of flower, coffee, salt and what little sugar he had was dumped in a pile of horse manure. His camp was a total disaster from one end to the next. 

Laying there his head hurting his neck hurting and his left leg was throbbing from what ever had hit him that part he remembered. Man would I like a drink of water and ever thing that I had is destroyed. What will I drink and what will I eat now. As he lay there he took a final look around and then that was when he saw the paw prints around the fire pit and as he continued to look he noticed there were many of them and he also saw a very large timber wolf pint in the mist of all the lions. But what really got his attention was the very large man’s footprint. Look at the size of that man’s bare footprint that is one big foot if I have ever saw one. He could not stand to put his foot next to it but he could see the print was almost twice his. He just leaned back and tried to figure out what he would do at this point. 

 

At supper that night each of the cats did not want anything to eat and neither did Nozzle. What is it with you guys this evening you usually eat everything I can set out. Even Moe did not drop in for a free piece of meat. Mary said I just see a little bit of what has happened and I think tomorrow morning we should take a little ride and to see what has happened to Sam. I think that would be a very good idea Mary. 

 

The next morning after breakfast Mary saddled Dawn and Dan saddled Shadow both putting saddle bags behind their saddles and both put a roll of bedding just in case they were to spend the night. Adam was still had to be carried by Mary and she had a special basket attached to the side of her horse so she could attend to him when the situation was needed.

Mary had ask Nozzle to lead them to the location and he was out front. Running ahead then stopping and turning his head back and watching to make sure they were in his sight. Crossing a small meadow Dan turned to Mary and said is that Sams horse over there against the trees. Yes I think it is who else’s could it be. Walking up Dan took ahold of the rope that was dangling from the horses neck and said this has been pulled apart not cut or untied as one might expect. We will bring it with us until we can decide what to do with it.

Continuing on Nuzzel came back and sat in front of Dan and just looked at him. What is it you want Nuzzel Dan ask. When Dan walked up Nuzzel just turned and walked to the side of Dan keeping in step but not getting very far from him. As they came through some heavy bushes Dan could see the campsite and all the distraction that had taken place. Stepping further into the camp he heard Sam moaning and he looked over and Sam was laying on his back his mouth was open and his eyes were closed but he was moaning and groaning. Leaning down Dan took from his shoulder the water bladder he carried and poured a few drops of water into Sams mouth. 

Licking his lips and in a very low voice said “More” and Dan poured another small amount of water into his mouth. Sams eyes came open and he looked into Dans eyes and said “you”, “you are the one that caused me all these troubles”. No Dan said you did I told you to leave the mountain and you gave not thought to it. All this could have been avoided had you listened to my words. 

I was attacked by a giant of a man. He gave me no warning I just woke up in pain and the whole camp had been destroyed. As to no warning Sam how much warning did you give him when you shot him in the back of the leg. He was running away and I tried to stop him. Looks like you did a good job are you happy now you stopped him. I did not know he would do this kind of damage to me. Just what did you expect him to do Sam after you shot him. Was you expecting a gift or welcome just what would you have expected. Give me some more water please. Oh, now we finally get some please I did not know you knew the word. 

I have not eaten in I do not know how many days but it has been before he destroyed my camp. You come into our forest and now you want us to take care of you. Is that what you expect after all that you have done, Sam. Well, it is the Christian thing to do Dan. What do you know about Christians Sam you go out to kill and now want us to be Christians. What part of religion teaches you that it is ok to kill just for the fun of it. Dan leaned down and poured a stream of water into Sams mouth and it ran down his chin and onto his chest. Lapping it up as fast as he could Sam continued to drink as fast and as much as he could. Hold on their Sam I have been trying to give you just a little bit at time. 

All this time Mary had stood back and was looking at the camp site. Eeny, Meeny and Miny were lined up shoulder to shoulder just watching. All three were setting on the rear ends with heads looking all directions and not a noise from any of them. Nuzzel had ran into the pile of can goods that had been knocked all over and were laying spread wide. Looking up Sam ask how can you be friends with all these animals. Well to begin with Sam we don’t try to kill them and we treat them with the same respect we want from them. Maybe you should learn a lesson from all of this if you live through it.

What am I to do at this point Dan I cannot walk and everything I ever had has been destroyed. I don’t even have a gun any more everything is either missing or destroyed. Do unto others as you would have them do unto you shore shows as meaning full for you Sam. What would you like us to do now we are not going to set here and take care of you and we are not taking you back to our camp so what would you like us to do shoot you. Oh! No as bad a shape as I am in I do not wish to die could you take me to that trading post down on the river. Yes that would be very good.

We will have to make do with what you have so get prepared for a ruff trip. Pulling Mary off to the side Dan ask Mary do you have any of the gold nuggets here that we found. Yes Dan remember we put several into the bottom of you saddle bags. Mary I have a little surprise for Sam I would like to put a couple of gold nuggets in his pocket so he does not find them until he is being taken care of and those that find them will want to know where and how he got them. Then they will be coming up here looking for gold we do not want that. Mary I am not figuring on staying here I would like to pick up and pack out as soon as possible. 

Ok Dan I will slip a couple of little ones into his pocket and we will leave him at the station. Gathering up Sam and sense he had nothing it did not take long to get him mounted and they were on their way. Traveling about five miles was all the time they had that day but Sam told them that at this rate by tomorrow night they could be in Little Town.  

Making camp was fast because they found a camp site that had been used before and the campfire pit already dug out and there were stumps pulled around the edges. Even had extra firewood available now that is what I call good camping. When we leave we must leave it the same way.  Getting Sam off and into a comfortable position took a little effort but when Ooga took ahold of him he came out of the saddle and onto the ground in one quick motion. Turning to Ooga Dan said “be careful we don’t want him to know you are here are had anything to do with his camp even though he knows let’s not give him anymore to use against us when he gets to his own people.”

 

After a getting everything ready it only took a little time and the party was on the way. It took Mary longer to get Adam ready and happy than anything else. Mary said to Dan I will surely be happy when Adam can walk and he had better by the time we get his brother here. Are you sure this one coming will be another boy it could be the girl you told about. No Dan this will be another boy I am sure of it.

After reaching the Little Town Dan pulled up in front of the sheriffs office and went in and found the man setting behind the desk had a belly big as a fifty-gallon drum and his boots that were on the desk had holes in the bottom and looked like they had been worn out twenty years ago. Well young feller what can I do for you. I am looking for the Sheriff. I am what’s left of him speak or go fishin. My name is Dan and I had a guy come into my camp up on the mountain East of here and he had been hunting a man and I ran him off after he told of wanting to shoot him just because he was so large.  So, what do you want me to do seems as though you took care of the situation. Turns out I had told him if he came back I would make life ruff on him and the next day I find he had shot the guy in the back of the leg just above the knee. And how do you know he was the one and how do you know where he was shot did you find the man. Yes we did Sheriff and I took him to our camp and we dug the bullet out of his leg and he is now doing good.

Seems like you do me a favor so I can cross that as to your needing my help. That is not quite how it ended up Sheriff we later found he had his camp destroyed and he figured I did it. First off stop calling me Sheriff I have a name and it is Penyton and I would thank you to use that not Sheriff. Ok Mr. Penyton we have him outside on his horse that we found on the way to his camp. 

Is he alive and breathing? Yes he is. Well, the next question I have for you is how did you find his camp and how did you know he was in trouble. First finding his camp was easy because I just let Nuzzel track him and Nuzzel is the one that came and got me to go to the camp. Nuzzel is a talking dog I take it. No Mr. Penyton when you have lived long enough with animals they let you know things if you listen. Yes I had a dog like that once he was very smart I had been training him not to eat and I just got him trained and he died on me. 

Perhaps we should go out and you can introduce me to this man, what is his name? Sam is all I know when he came into my camp he made sure I knew and he I one big fellow. The man he shot was bigger than him? Yes the man he shot is almost nine feet tall. The sheriff through down his cigar and looked Dan in the eye and said “did you say nine feet tall. Yes I did and he is built to fit that height. Not in my life have I ever heard of anyone getting that big Penyton said as he went out the front door. 

Sam was leaned over and tied to the saddle so he would not fall off and when the Sheriff approached him he looked down at the Sheriff and said arrest this man Sheriff he tried to kill me. That is interesting to say the least now we have a killer wanting justice. Hell, there is no law against shooting an animal sheriff. Sam that is your name isn’t it? Yes. Dan here said you shot a man he didn’t tell me he was an animal. Well Sheriff what would you call a creature that is over nine feet tall and is covered in hair not skin like we have but hair like an ape. First thing comes to my mind his I would call him hairy. But can you tell me more about this guy we have been hearing rumors of others saying they have been seeing thing out in the woods that are like a big gorilla. 

Can you help me down from this horse? Dan lifted me up here like a ten-pound sack of flour.  He don’t show the strength he has but if you had watched him put me on this horse you would have a great respect for his strength. 

Lifting Sam from the horse took a few that were standing watching all this and when he was on the ground he could not stand his leg was hurting so badly. What happened to your leg Sam. I don’t know I was in camp and it was like something took a big bite out of it and I cannot put weight on it to walk. Do you need to see the doctor? Yes I think that would be a good idea but I have very little money. Reaching into his pocket he brought out two gold nuggets that were big as marbles. What do you mean you have no money where did you get those? I don’t know Sheriff I never saw them before. 

The men in the crowd started to yelling he has gold nuggets big as walnuts he has found where they are. The people started to push Sam and got right up in his face and wanted to know where he found them. Regardless of how many times Sam said he knew nothing about them the more the people got mad and insisted he tell them. 

Thing got out of hand and the Sheriff was screaming and yelling for those that had ahold of Sam to let him go. The crowd had grown in size so fast that the Sheriff had to shoot this six gun into the air and yell shut up all of you I am tired of all this. Let go of Sam and you can talk all you want to him later right now he is telling me he has been out hunting Big Foot. With the crowd already excited and growing in size fast the words went out in a hurry that Sam had shot Big Foot and that surprised the Sheriff because no one should have known. Little did Penyton know that nothing said in his office was a secret to anyone everyone knew two minutes after it was said. Word spread through town like free drinks at the bar. 

While this was going on the Mayor of the town Mr. Brown who had been watching all this heard all of this plus he had gotten a look at Mary Dans wife and he had turned to his assistant and said I am going to get that woman for myself. She is the most beautiful woman I have ever saw. Crowley the assistant pointed out that she was an Indian and there would be talk if he were to have a squaw in his house. We’ll let em talk I will have that woman and not allow the old bitties talk all they want I get what I want and they can go to blazes for all I care. How much resistance can one guy cause I have many men who can handle him and I will see him run out of town and he will be lucky to have his life. 

Sam had been carried over to the doctor’s office but the problem was he was on the second floor and it took four men to get him up the stairs and into Dr. Smith’s office. While that was going on others were crowding around Dan wanting to know if he had any gold and if he knew where Sam had gotten his. Dan explained that he was camping and just meet Sam and knew nothing about the man, which was not lying. But the shoving and crowding was making Adam cry and he was throwing a fit that would not stop. 

When others came around Mary and Dan the lions came running into town and Nuzzel knocked one man down and was standing oh him. The crowd went wild running and screaming the town is being invaded by mountain lions there are hundreds of them and the hysteria grew and the more that ran the louder the crowd became. Mary had gotten out of the saddle trying to calm Adam down and when all the excitement started she was having problems getting into the saddle when all a once she was lifted and placed in the saddle. Thank you Ooga I was in trouble trying to get onto the horse. Dan just jumped from the sidewalk which was higher than the street but he made one swift leap and was astraddle of Shadow and when he hit the saddle he just said lets go now. Shadow turned and headed out of town and the Mayor was watching and was to far away to slow Dan or Mary in their efforts to leave. So, with dust flying Mary and Dan was going as fast as the horses could travel and no one was in the way because they had ran for their homes. The dogs from town were barking the windows upstairs were full of those wanting the last words and not wanting to miss anything. Horses were running wild though the streets and to make it worse Rip Raffel’s pigs broke through the fence and were running around chasing the dogs. 

Ooga was swatting dogs from one side to the other the dogs did not see him but knew from the smell and they were trying to attack him. The show that was going on was exciting to say the least Mrs. Fowler later told everyone the dogs were being thrown into the air and nothing was there to throw them. The sight was total disaster from one end of town to the other. Pigs running wild, dogs cats and horses fighting just to make noise. 

The men were gathering around the front of Bill’s Pool Hall trying to find a way to find where that gold was and part of them wanted to know about Big Foot and the fact he had been seen. We have to find that camp where Sam was and it may be a good idea if we could find Dans place all so if he knows Sam had gold he may have gotten his hands on it and it could be in his camp. We have to check everything and Big Foot will just have to wait. 

Leaving the town and crossing two streams Dan slowed down and allowed Mary to ride beside him. How is the little one doing Mary he asks. Oh, he has stopped screaming and has been laughing now he thinks all that noise was for him. He is enjoying all the people and all the attention we all got. I don’t think it would be a good idea to go back to our camp except to load some of the stuff and get away from there as fast as possible. 

 In the meantime, back at the Lost knowledge the local newspaper Jules Cutrate a writer who had come to town because he had heard stories the Big Foot had been heard of in this area. So, he was meeting with Ed Frisk the publisher and owner of the daily paper. Ed you know I came to town because I heard that Big Foot was here and now that this opportunity has come to light I want to have help from back east to help me follow and get all the information possible about the giant of the forest. My readers are all wanting to know more about him and what he looks like what he does and why no one can get close to him. So please help me hire someone while I am waiting for help from back east.

                                                                               

Ooga lead Dan and Mary up a stream until another stream lead into the one they were following. Turning to the right and continuing up stream staying in the water so the dogs could not follow the scient and footprints would not show. Ooga had so many attempts to follow him over the years he knew just what to do and how to do it so no one could follow him. Continuing up the stream it came alone side of a cliff so the water was washing against the mountain and as they got to the side of it Ooga reached out and taking a hold of a tall rock that appeared to be leaning against the mountain which it had been doing for a thousand years but know he pulled and it came away from the mountain far enough we could slide inside. The rock was so large no one would ever imagine it being moved but after getting on the inside I see that Ooga had called for help and there were four other fellows pushing the top of the rock far enough we could walk right on in and not have to unload the horses or anything. We all followed Ooga into the mountain and turning I could see why no one could ever find this places. We had not left the water we were still in the water up to our knees when we went into the space opened to us. After going in the men just let the rock settle back against the mountain and it would have been impossible to know we had turned from the water.

The whole family joined us as we went into the mountain. Even the three mountain lions had no problem going with us but I had not realized that Ooga was talking to them all the time. Nuzzle would be by my side regardless but I have no doubt he had heard one way or another the thoughts of Ooga. As we went back into the mountain I could see very plainly because there were torches on both sides lighting the way. As we went in the trail was slightly up hill so the further we went the higher we were above the water from the stream. The opening was all of twenty feet wide and I could not see the top so it was not like I was in a cave it was more like I was in a large valley that was very dark. But like I say the torches had everything we could see but I suspect that Ooga and those that had now joined us did not need the lighting I think they could travel this without the lights. Don’t know what made me think this maybe it was another thing that I just knew in my mind without verbal words. 

Later I learned that Deep Pockets (don’t know if that was his real name but it is the only one I ever heard used) the town banker had called a special meeting with all the share holders in the bank and had explained to them that with the gold that had been found on Sam it could very well start a gold rush which would bring many people to this area and the bank would make a very good income from those that would be coming in to build and to buy things necessary to mine for more gold. So, he was explaining to all that they must join those that were out hunting for Dan and see if they could learn more from him about where the gold came from. He felt a thousand-dollar bounty for bringing in Dan and another thousand if they could bring in Big Foot. This he told them would give the extra incentive to get this done. 

 

As Dan and Mary rode back into the cave they came to a very large room which to her surprise was well lit. Looking up she could see a very large rock that seemed to bring in the light and spread it throughout the room. She stopped and pointed up for Dan to look and he said it looks like a crystal but I have never saw one that big before. Looking around the room they, both were lost in what to say there was so much to see. A water fall at the back into a pool of water that was so clear you could see the bottom of the pond it fell into. Starting at the pond and winding up running all the way around the giant room was a trail leading to the top which was a long way up. At different places were openings like small caves that were on the trail. So, in effect they had a stairway to more possibly private caves.  Children were in the pool playing and swimming and they were just like Ooga they had hide that was very hairy exactly like Ooga. The pool was so large it made it impossible for Dan to count the children and the fact they were running all about did not help. The fact the room held a very good temperature was not lost on Dan either. Coming to a stop Ooga was standing with several others that were his size and they also looked like Ooga but each was different but not by a lot. Some a few inches shorter some taller but all built the same way and obviously they were welcoming Dan and Mary into their homes. 

I don’t know if I hear them or if it just comes to me what they are saying but I know that we are the first to ever be allowed to see what we are seeing. The fact we had helped Ooga and taken care of him was what had done the trick. It was known that we would never be allowed to tell others what we were seeing and we knew that but they knew we would honor that. Dan had no idea how many people were here but they were all busy doing one thing or another. As Dan took a few minutes more to just look around he saw many small openings in the walls that were perhaps five feet wide and twelve feet high just guessing.

 

In the center of the room was a large table with stacks of greenery that was piled very high and there were many different plants there. People would just stop by and take a hand full and walk off eating it. A small boy came by and took both Dan and Mary’s horses and another young man took ahold of Buster and led them off around the corner from where Dan could not see them. This place is Hugh Dan said it does not end with what we can see it goes on and on. Yes Mary said and what is up there where that trail led too. The women were cleaning the branches on the table and Dan noticed that they just like the men were hair all over their bodies and the woman had large breasts just as other women in the world do but these were hairy and the nipple had no hair growing around them. 

One of the women came up to Mary and picked up Adam and held him to her and Mary could tell she was very pleased to be allowed to hold him. She indicated that they were to follow her so Dan stepped up beside Mary and they were led around another corner and an opening of about five feet was on their left and this woman just walked into it and as she did she picked up a small stone and when she moved her hand across it the stone lit up and the whole room started to shine from the light. Looking around there were several beds with skins of some kind stretched across a wooden frame. A table was against one wall and several chairs but Mary did not know if she could set on one they were so tall. She went over and sat on a bed and it was just right for her height. Anything they wanted she was told would be furnished and they were expected to come to the middle of the room after unpacking all of her stuff. She looked around and there were deer antlers all along the wall that were used for hooks to hang stuff on. The woman left after Dan had told her how much we appreciate the hospitality. 

Dan she said when she picked up Adam have you ever in your life saw a cave so large. Never heard of any around here but we are new to this area and who knows what else is around here in all these mountains. I would like to go up that ramp or whatever they call them and see if we can get on top of the mountain. When we go out I will ask that question what do you have in mind Mary. Well Dan sense we walk into that little town things have grown terrible in the world. What do you mean Mary. Well first I did not have a chance to tell you but the Mayor of the town wants to capture me and make him his woman. I can stop that if I can get on top of this mountain by just putting a curse on him. 

Woe! little princess are you saying you have the same thing as a witch? Dan a witch was a title gave to someone who does harm. I do not do this to harm him I do it to save me and if he is like this to me who else and what will he do in the future I can prevent that. Dan there is more to this there is a man who wants to write a story about the man we call Ooga and he calls him Big Foot and he wants to get all the information possible about him he has offered a hundred dollars to anyone who will give him any information that he does not have. Dan that is more money than some of these people make all year. The barber is offering free haircuts to any who brings him information. Sally’s is offering a free poke to any man that will bring information. The grocery store is offering twenty dollars of free food. It has gone crazy here the people are so greedy I have never saw such as this is. Are all of your people this way Dan? No Princess, not all but those that are greedy have a way of making those around them be greedy also. Hunger for what one does not have is a strong incentive to be tight with money. Some have a signal and they touch there elbow with the palm of the other hand indicating that you are such. 

How can we go anywhere or do anything with all these people wanting to know if you can tell where Sam got the gold. This gold is making everyone in this village crazy with hunger for riches. Like the Mayor in my village if a man were to want me from you he would have to challenge you to a fight and the winner would take me and I would have no choice. This, however, would not be possible because my statis in my world would not allow them to challenge you. But we still have rules even though they speak of us as uneducated heathens. 

Let us join the people and learn all we can from these who live in the forest.  The men in town are saying that we are hiding in the forest and they will not stop until they find us. Even if they could follow our footprints under water they could not lift that large stone in front from the outside. You notice that they had built a place at the top of the stone on the inside where they could put many men and they are at the top on the inside pushing which allows the stone to move. 

After taking care of little Adam, they walked into the great room to see all the people in lines facing a great picture of a cross and all were on their knees with their heads bowed. Dan said they are praying and we must not do anything to disrupt this. I have not ever saw so many people with total silence as this. But Mary you have noticed they don’t speak allowed like we do anyway. The silence that I felt was strong inside me when we entered anyone. I could not understand how that could be with the children running around playing the women working and all those men doing whatever each was doing and not a noise was amazing to me. A few grunts and many whistles from one or the other I was in shock of all that silence but it is very relaxing to me. We must be quite while they pray. 

After a few minutes all stood and put both hands in the air and then they reached down and picked up whatever that was they were kneeling on and all went a different direction. Everyone busy I noticed that each seems to have a job to do and everyone stays busy doing whatever it is they are building. Most I noticed make baskets and water containers. In my village they would be making arrows or bows but I do not see a weapon being built. Let us ask Ooga why and if they eat meat. 

Ooga walked up and with him were two others and they stopped in front of Dan and Mary and they spoke but not verbally I heard what they said Dan told Mary. Thank you for your hospitality Mary said in her mind and one of the men held his palm out with the fingers up and Mary pushed her hand against his and then Dan did the same thing and all both of the others with Ooga did likewise. Then Ooga said this is Muta and Aero they are leaders here in the home. 

Aero ask if there was any questions. Mary said yes I would like to know if that trail leads to the top of this mountain and the outside. Yes he said Mary we knew of your coming the same way you knew of our people. We know that you have the gift of your people and have many powers they do not have. We have accepted you into our lives because of this and we also feel the warmth of both of your hearts and we see many good things. We also know of the hunt the villagers are doing trying to find the yellow rocks and also the desire to capture you. Do not let it bother you in the least we have been hunted for hundreds of years and so far they have only caught a glimpse of us once in a while. This is a game to us and we enjoy playing with them but we have a big advantage we know what they are thinking and when they set a trap we already know where and what it will be. So do not be alarmed we are very experienced in this game.

Thank you Aero for that and yes I know a lot more than I have told Dan about but that will come in time. Right now, I would ask that we be allowed to partake of something to eat. Would fish be alright he asked? That would be wonderful, Mary said. With that Muta turned and with a hand he pointed to the pond and three men came forward and jumped into the water and in only a moment he raised up and gave another a large fish then he ducked down and came back up with another and he did this until he had four nice fish that were each about an arm length each. The men holding the fish walked over and put them on the table where several women cleaned them and washing in a bucket that must have been there for that very reason cleaned them off and then she walked over to the wall and rolled a rock that was setting on a shelf to the side and in behind it was what appeared to be a small fire pit and she placed the fish on what looked like rods of some kind and in a single motion the fire came to life. I will have to learn how she did that Mary thought to herself. Then she just rolled the rock back in front of the opening and turned to us. Reaching into a bag beside the table she brought out what looked like potatoes and she placed these on a wooden plate and began to cut them into pieces. Another woman was cutting up carrots at least that is what they looked like. 

Ooga said that they did not drink coffee but they had it available and knowing Dan was a big user they had a regular coffee pot waiting on the side of the table and the steam was coming off the pot so Dan knew it was hot. In only a few minutes Dan and Mary sat down to a table and among the things that were available to them was milk for Adam and a bowl of something that looked like ground corn or whatever it was but there was a large bowl of that and a small bowl for Adam.

After breakfast Muta walked up and ask if they would like to see the top of the mountain now. Yes I sure would Dan said and Mary said let me get a pack to put Adam in so I can carry him with us. She left returning with a wooden frame with should straps that allowed Adam to be hung on Mary’s back in a special soft leather basket tied to the frame for her backpack.

On the way up the walk Ooga joined them and together they were going up the trail when Muta ask Dan if Ooga 

 

CHAPTER SIX

 

Enjoying the fruits of life

 

had told him of the ships that came to the mountain at different times. Ship to a mountain how can a ship come to a mountain Dan ask. Well, Muta said maybe it is not a ship because it comes from above and not out of the water but it is as big as a ship. Now Muta had Dans full attention and Dan ask if Muta had heard that Dan had wings and could fly. Muta stopped, turned, glanced at Dan, and asked, “You think you can fly?”  I have flown many times and when we get to the top of this mountain it may just be a perfect place for me to take off from. Ooga turned to Muta and said he had been saved by Dan flying over and he hung onto his legs while he lifted him from harms way. Are you telling me Ooga that you have been in the ski like a bird with Dan. Yes I told you that before. I thought you were just imagining it. No, he can fly like an Eagle and sore in the winds.  

Dan wanted more information about those that Muta had called ships that came from the ski. Did they land here on the mountain top he ask? Yes they come every so often and they may just land for a few minutes or they once were here for several days. But we never know when they will arrive. Do you see those that fly this ship Dan ask. Yes we have spoke to them on several occasions. We will go into this subject again but right now I would like to look at the top and walk around it a little bit and kind of get the feeling of how big and what is here. 

Walking around and looking down Dan saw that indeed there was a cliff and it went straight down from the top and was about fifty feet wide with no trees or anything to get in the way of Dan taking off from here. In fact, Dan said it is the perfect place because there is even room to land here and I can get a run at the edge of the mountain if I should want to. The mountain was very large on top and had a few trees but they were not very tall and Dan called them scrawny little things. Walking around Dan could see where something had burnt the surface of a pretty big area and it made no sense to him how it had seemed to even heat the vegetation that had been growing there. Dan ask Muta is this where that ship stopped. Yes it was here several times and each time it stopes right here. Mary notice that where this is it is much lower than the surrounding area so with the ship setting here no one from below or on another mountain would be able to see it. I don’t understand this but they would be able to hid and no one would suspect them of being up here on this mountain top. This is mighty interesting Mary I would like to know more about this and I wonder how many from Little Town have saw one of these ships. Not sure we will get on good enough terms with them to find the answer but if I find someone that is one of my first questions. 

You know Mary that these people have knowledge and don’t even know they have that knowledge. What do you mean Dan? Well think about it my flying was a big thing to others what would they think if they saw something as large as a ship. Also, I would like to know what could burn the ground so bad across such an area and another thing is the whole area was burnt the same all over. Think about this Mary a fire burns some places and others it does not like a tree can burn but next to it is not as hot but this burn was total and from side to side nothing that did not get totally burnt. 

Mary another thing I found out was during the conversation of those ships I was told that when the people from the ship were talking with Ooga and friends they talked of time. I do not understand all that I hear but the way I understood it was they were told that time is like a coin. Two sides the one side is the past the other is the future. When one wants to look back they think of the past but when wants to think of the future you must think in the future. How can one think in the future when it is not here yet. They say we have the ability of either one. Both in our heads just a matter of getting head adjusted to that type of thinking. Makes my head hurt while trying to think about it. May be I think in the future I lay down and take a nap that be my future. 

You go take a nap I think I will go to the mountain top and make a small fire and then I put Mr. Brown in a deep brown hole where he no longer wants woman. OK, see you later I don’t want to watch that it is better if I take nap and stay away from that stuff. 

Dan went to their house and Mary went to the top of the mountain and Nuzzel, Eeny and Miny went along to be with her and on the outside of the mountain. The cats with all the camping saw Mary shape the fire pit and immediately went and started bringing in firewood. This time she told them we want green wood not dry wood we want lots of smoke to let the gods know we are talking. After getting the fire burning and much smoke boiling out of the fire pit. Mary stood in front of the smoke and began her communications with the heavens. Along with the name and title of Mr. Brown the Mayor of Little Town she described the man as to being two inches taller than her and had a face like a frog his face was covered with marks of some kind and his eyes were like two holes in the snow. She went on to describe him and then she said he will no longer be able to concentrate on women and he would not be able to bring strength to his body parts necessary to satisfy him or a woman. He would no longer desire a woman to even be around him he would be happy to be alone and not have the even hear a woman’s voice. She told of the headaches and pain he would get when he tried to talk and he would not be able to even think about touching one. With this she ended by repeating the family tree as far back as her great grandmother and the knowledge that had been passed on to her and she also told that she would not receive any displeasure or problems from putting this lifestyle on Mr. Brown because she was doing the world a favor not one that was only for her benefit. She knew that by giving others a future of negativity she could receive part of that so she wanted the Gods to know she was helping more than the one she was hindering. With that she threw a bag of bones she had picked up and through them into the flames. Let this begin she said and then put the fire out.

Crowley turned to Mr. Brown and said we have all in place for when that woman called Mary should show up here in town. We have men waiting to capture her and we will put something in her mouth so she can’t yell and let others know and we have cabin ready for her. I have changed my mind I no longer want that woman in fact I want you to get Mayble out of my house and out of my sight. I never want to see her again or any other female that has been my sore spot and cost me all this money and time. That will be the last time I spend money on such trash and such nonsense as I have been doing for years. What has happened to you to change so much so fast Mr. Brown? Finally got my head straightened out and can see that I have been wasting a lot of time and a lot of money. Get rid of the men pay them off and send them down the road if I need them I will let you know. Good day Crowley and with that he turned and walked off. 

Turning to Dan Mary said I would like to know more of what they told you those that were in the ship talked and I would like to know as much as I can about what was said. Well, we can ask for more information but it was confusing to me he was talking about Energy and that all things on our earth has energy. Has the sunlight got energy Dan? That was another thing he said that all of earth have ways of transfer thoughts and one of them was that each verbal thought had to have a definition as to its meaning. Without this definition what one said the other would not know the meaning. Well, we know several languages and we have not dictionary how do we know. His point was that we have idea of what energy is but we not understand that energy is a lot more than most understand. Yes sunlight has energy but so does a thought when verbal to the world.  Mary many of these things I tell you but I not know what the thing is about anymore than you do. But he did say a thought is an energy but a different kind so thought is not the same type of energy a thought he says is a whole different thing. A thought can go around the world ten times and not even have a way of timing it because it happen before you can time. He even went beyond that he say we can move our thoughts anywhere we want to and we can understand more than verbal. Look Mary we are talking with Ooga and several others and we not move our lips. I have gotten to the point I can walk up and know what I am to know very fast. He says there is not time except the time we put on it. Whatever that means. He also said that if the mind was to put a message to a friend in another country he would be able to speak to them as we speak to Ooga. 

Dan this is more things than I have ever been allowed to even talk with other leaders in my village. Well one more thing before we stop talking about it I must tell you. Let me think how he said it. Oh! He said that our mind travels by a different energy and if the mind could overtake the body then the body would be this energy and that energy could travel and when arrived wherever you want you can trade the energy back and be where you imagined you wanted to be. Dan are you telling me that I can think about our village and then go to that village and be with my family in a heartbeat. Mary listen to me I do not understand all this and I want to know a lot more about this and also those that visit this mountain. I would like to know what they look like, where they came from. He did say the name of another universe and I don’t even know what a universe is. I will promise you this, Mary after we have stood on the bank of the great ocean on the West we will return here. I would like that Dan. I do not like living in this cave because I like to see the sun rise in the morning and I want to see it grow dark slowly. I not use to walking into sunshine from darkness. But I do want to know more about this travel and also I would like to see those who float the great boat in the ski. 

Now I would like to take Adam and go set on the banks of a lake and just relax and enjoy the sunshine. I am not sure if we can do that right now the forest is full of men who are everywhere looking for us. I think I can stop some of that let me take our whole family to the lake and when someone shows we will chase them away. The trouble with that Mary is one of our furry friends may get shot chasing someone away and then we have other problems.

 

Ooga what do you suggest we would like to leave the cave and spend a little time in the forest what would you have us do? Go on top of the mountain and you have what you want and no one can find you there. Can we take our horses and mules also? Of course, you can just ride them up the trail and they we be happy when the see the sunshine also. 

So, the whole family was laughing at Adam trying to walk and Moe landed alongside of Adam and walked beside him as he stumbled along. Mary do you know how many kids have ever saw an Eagle let alone have one for a personal pet. Yes Adam is not old enough to understand how lucky he is to have such a bird to be a friend. Dan have you looked down to see if you could fly from here. Yes Mary and I have no doubts that I could take off from here and also land here so this is an ideal place for us to be camped. Do you think you could fly and take Adam with you? I had not thought about it but if I had a way to hang him in front of me I could take him for a ride. We will talk about this later.

Dan I have a suggestion that you may not want to help but I think it would be a good way to stop them from hunting us. What do you have in mind Princess? Well Dan they have a camp somewhere and they all go out and hunt us from that camp. I would like to have our friends help us and also Ooga and his friends. Just what would take so many people to do. I would like to cause them problems kind of like our friends did to Sam. How would you knock out that many men at once. We do not have to knock them out we just have to cause a lot of troubles and cause them to be in confusion. How would you do that? Allow me to show you. We first must talk to those that would help and I think many would enjoy causing those that hunt them to have problems. I will go along with this crazy idea as long as we both know that no one I to be killed. Oh, Dan I not want them knocked out I not want them dead I just want them to have many problems.

That night at the campfire the townspeople had built several fire pits to cook and to add light to the camping area. As Tom went to walk between two fires his front foot was knocked sideways and his step which should have been along side of the fire pit seemed to be pushed sideways and he stepped into the fire box with all the meat hanging into the fire and he knocked most sticks and the meat feel into the flames. His pants caught on fire and he jumped and pulled himself free of the fire but everyone was yelling you crazy idiot you knock everything off and spoil our dinner. Are you drunk what is wrong with you.

Rodger reached for the rack that had held the meat and he lost his balance and dropped the water jar he had into the firepit. The flames died down and the sparks flew everywhere. John came running to grab Rodger and he stepped into the fire pit next to this one trying to help. Johns pants caught on fire and he was screaming and yelling. Martha was putting meat onto the fire next to that one and the smoke and flames were so much she could not see and she was staggering around trying to get herself in control when Bob ran into her and pushed her into the rack holding the meat for the fire pit. The dogs started to bark at something that no one could see but they were running around barking and twisting this way and that like they were trying to bite something that no one could see. 

The confusion and screaming came from everyone who was around watching and they started to laughing and yelling of the stupid stuff happening. Doug jumped up from his log and was threating to shoot the next guy that stepped into a fire pit. You dumb thing he was screaming at Martha and she was yelling back at him. The noise got the dogs more excited and the barking got worse the crowd noise got so bad you could not talk. Someone stumbled and feel into the table that had all the plates, glasses and pitchers of water. The table got knocked over with all the confusion and part of the salads, ketchup, mustard, bread and fixtures for dinner went into two different fire pits and that that did not was trampled by others. Betty Boston went into a fit of screaming and yelling that added to the excitement. Who turned the horses loose no one knew but they were running into the crowd and trying to get away from all of this the horses were running through the tents alongside. Somebody was throwing whiskey bottles into the fire pits making the flames jump and dance higher.  Tents were torn down tables were overturned. Somehow all the beds that were in the tents seemed to just roll into the isles. Children were running everywhere hunting their mothers and fathers and that added to the turmoil. Kids yelling for Mom or Dad, dogs barking, men screaming at each other. Some were fighting and rolling into the tents and tables.

 

The next morning as the men sat around the campfire holding their heads. Some with black eyes some with slings holding their arms, some with crutches carved out of anything they could find to support themselves. This is a fine how dee doo if I have every saw one. Look at this crowd does it look like we can assemble this into any king of manageable society. Gladys says she is packing up the kids and everything they brought and she is leaving. Yes Tom said mine woman says the same thing she is not going to stick around for more of this. We will be lucky to have enough to make much of a hunt out of this and I don’t see how we could expect them to ever return. 

Setting on the mountain top looking down ten or twenty Big people were setting and watching the activities. Dan turned to Mary and said that was a great idea and I have another one. Way back when I was in Boston I owned a shop and I took pictures for a living. I developed and framed these and sold to my customers. So, I have experience in photographs as we use the term today. My idea is based on the fact that our next biggest problem is the newspaper man who is offering all this money and is going to bring thousands of people here to chase and make life terrible for those they call Big Foot. Mary I know how to stop this and have it over forever. 

OK Dan I believe you what do you need to do this? Well first I need the camera. How do we do that she asks? If I can explain to Ooga what it looks like he could walk in while invisible and walk right out with it. 

Ooga I have a special favor to ask of you. Let me explain what it is I need. Drawing in the sand on the bank of the lake Dan drew a picture of a tripod and what the camera looked like. Then he told how he would know about the room where Jules Cutrate has his developing equipment. After Ooga walked in he waited for Jules to take a picture and then he went back to Dan and described what he had saw and wanted to know if that was what he wanted. Yes Dan told him Ooga went back and Jules put the camera away for the day. Ooga just waited for Jules to turn his back and Ooga walked out the door with the camera, the stand for the cameras and the bar for the flash which Dan had forgotten to mention. 

Bringing all the camera and attachments to Dan Ooga just stood and waited for Dan response. Ooga how did you know to bring the flash bar? He used it while I watched and if he used it I thought you might want to use it, so I brought it too. Now what I need to do is get you to find me several pigs that we can use in our pictures. That not a problem I have many such friends. When you want them? We will go down by the lake and set up a place where I can take the pictures I want. 

Lining up the pigs and putting one in a dress that Mary had gotten from a little girl she had been saving for her own daughter. They dressed a pig in a dress then got it to stand next to another pig and when all ready to take the picture he had Ooga step between the camera and the pigs so when he took the picture you could not see the pigs only Ooga. So Dan took many pictures then with Ooga and several others he took all the equipment to town and late at night slipped into Jules’ dark room and developed the pictures. 

The next day Dan walked into Jules Cutrate’s office and lad down several photos off Big Foot. He was standing down by the lake which gave depth to the picture but the trees in the background showed just how large a man he was. Jules looked at the pictures and immediately got excited and was offering Dan as much money as he had ever thought possible for taking pictures. That is more money than I got for selling the hole studio back home. Jules paid Dan for the pictures and then wrote a brief description of what they were seeing and all the proof necessary to show what others could see in the forest around here. When Jules put them into the envelope to send Ooga walked up beside Dan and together they watched the image of Ooga disappear like it had never been there and all that was shown was a family of pigs and one had a dress on and the other was leaning over her like he was helping her up or something. In the background were many other pigs. 

Yes Ooga when they get these pictures back in 

Boston Jules will not be as popular as he once was. No one will ever want to hear him speak of the Big Foot that he told so much about and then sent a picture of a family of pigs for proof. Will be interesting to wait and see how long it takes Jules to pack up and leave. 

 

Dan that was a very clever idea that you had and I am sure we will not have to put up with him much longer. That will draw the offers for money for information to a dry up. Now what else do we have to solve before we can continue our travels to the ocean. Andrew is getting to where he can walk but I am getting so big I can hardly walk. Soloman will be our next boy and he will be a great man with your people. 

I think the way to find if we have problems or not is to just walk right down the sidewalk and I will take you into a café which I will bet you have never sat at a table and let someone else wait on you. Come on Mary get Adam and lets go to town. 

Walking into Diana Diner they were escorted over to a table that had a highchair beside it. Putting Adam in the chair the lady turned and set a menu in front of Mary and said that is the specials the regular everyday good stuff is written on the blackboard over there. With that she left and returned with two glasses of water. Would you like coffee she ask. Yes Dan said and Mary said, “can I have what I want?” Of course, what would you have Mary. I would like some peppermint tea. Laughing Betty, the waitress said we do not have peppermint but we do offer a green tea. That would be fine Mary said and Betty turned to Dan and ask if he knew what he would like to order. 

Looking at the wall and then the menu Dan said I think I would like some of those griddle cakes and a half dozen eggs not turned over just make sure the yokes are not broken. First I need to know is that mush that they speak of is that like oatmeal a bowl of ground up wheat or corn. Yes Mary that is about what it is. Ok bring one for Adam and I will take a very large fish. Where do you see fish Mary? It is not on the menu and not on the wall. You said I could have anything I wanted now you limit me to a list of things. Mary if your intention is to make me angry you are wasting your time. I can set and drink my coffee and enjoy the day just fine. 

Ok Dan just order me something to eat I want to see how they fix it. You will have to have permission to go into the kitchen but here. Betty can Mary be allowed to look into the kitchen. With that Mary got up and followed Betty into the kitchen where she stood and watched as two male cooks were putting eggs on the skillet and a large steak was on another stove top but both men were very busy cooking. One of the cooks turned to Mary and ask if she had never saw a man cook before. Yes she said but never when he did not have to bend over the fire to do it. For such a pretty woman you have never saw the inside of a white man’s house. No, she said I have never. I lived in the villages of many but none cooked on what ever this is you use. Joining Dan at the table Betty sat the bowl of cereal in front of Adam and Mary added a little milk and she turned to Dan and said what is this white stuff that they have in this little bowl? Oh, Dan said you have never tasted sugar have you. “Sugar? What is that?” Mary asked, curiosity flashing in her voice.

“Well, Mary, lick your finger and then put it into that bowl,” he said, gesturing toward the glistening granules. Mary did as instructed, her finger sinking into the fine crystals. “Now taste it,” he continued, his tone gentle and encouraging. She brought her finger to her mouth. As the sweetness melted on her tongue, a delighted smile spread from ear to ear, and her eyes lit up with pure, sparkling joy. The surprise of the sugar’s delicate taste and the rush of sweetness made her giggle softly, savoring this simple pleasure for the first time. If I put this on Adams cereal he will want it every time I serve him this thing they call mush. We can arrange that princess we will be around others for the next part of our journey I am sure. 

After breakfast Dan took Adam and put him on his shoulders and then with Mary at his side he walked down the sidewalk looking in all the store windows and Adam would squeal and point to different things and Mary was amazed at the different cloth that was on the dresses. Mary said I have never saw so many colors and they are so bright and cheerful to see. A few people nodded but no one said anything derogatory or degrading to either of them so they just continued on down looking a enjoying the sights of the shopping area. You know Princess I was wondering about Barber that was giving those free haircuts to. that I never did hear what happened to that barber that was giving free haircuts. Dan I forgot to tell you somehow he started to loose his eyes sight. Real 130 Strange how he just developed this eye problem out of nowhere and he was cutting their hair show bad that most of his business dried up and he was trying to sale everything he has so he can move. Mary you didn’t happen to have anything to do with that barbers eyes sight would you? Not as much as you may be thinking I did offer a few suggestions if that counts against me. Do I have to stand you on your head and shake this out of you Mary. Please tell me how he went blind and you only offered advice. Well, he was offering money to everyone for this information so I just offered some advice. Ya and they took that advice and now what Mary? Turns out he didn’t listen so what he lost was his own fault, not mine. Please explain this for me. I was very honest with him I told him that if he sold information and it was not true would he not get into trouble Dan? Well, he didn’t listen he like the Raccoon that got killed on the railroad tracks he didn’t listen. You know Mary I am sure glad you didn’t go back East to collage. Why Dan? Because sometimes I cannot understand how you can be so wise and yet so unschooled. Big words makes little man. But I not just have my knowledge I have added several grandmothers that have added to my wisdom. Do you think that because they were smart and died that you got added educational 131 rights. You foolish man how you not ask if you not know if I can help explain something I will be glad to do it. We not go into that now we have to many things that we should be doing. Most obviously my education will be interesting to say the least but when we get snowed in one day I will want to know more about the Barber because I would feel bad it you had participated in his loosing his business. Mary started to say something when Dan reached over put his hand over her mouth and said you forget more stuff than anyone else I know of but you will get days and days of snow and more snow and on those days I am standing at the window so bored I am about to count snowflakes I will remember to let you say what you were about to say. Until this kiss me and don’t hold back for anything. Mary is there anything else we must do before leaving. You are many months away from delivering Soloman and Adam is getting big enough that he is less work so we should be looking at leaving soon. One other little bitty baby thought I have been having most beautiful Princess is that lady who own the dress shop you had told of her giving away free fighting for information would you like to tell me that story now or have me read it in the paper? You know if they tried to print it no one would believe it anyway. Ok great leader of my family please give me in 132 idea of how a woman who had never saw a store that sold anything a year ago now tells everyone the problems that they created. No, don’t tell me I want to leave before the snow fly’s so lets jump to the ending did the shop burn down. No Dan it is still there, whoa that is good news. Now no one died or got killed did they? No Dan again they were not harmed. I know this is a slow way to get information but I also know it is faster than the other way let her tell it. Look Dan I tell more someday when it matters so for now let me just say the simple truth. She got caught with stranger in her bed and when it came out there were others that knew but didn’t want to talk about it. The customers stopped shopping there and she close business. OK Mary I take that and we forget for now and he thinks to himself ya you not chase that subject any more and be sleeping in visitors tee pee tonight. I do not want to ask but curious was there others Mary? Yes Dan there were many even the maids were betting and they also got a little learning done also. Ok lets figure on leaving in four days that should give us plenty of time to get ready. That is fine Dan but I want your promise that after we go to the great sea in the West that you not hunt for reason to not come back here. You 133 know I spent a lot of time in special tee pee for all in counsel of our tribe so you must promise me we will be back and live with them until we learn the secrets. Yes Princess but you know I receive just as you do only mine comes from God and the more I learn the more I realize even though you speak of the difference I truly believe we speak of the same deity. But Dan I know you spend time with Ooga, Muta and Aero but you not tell me of the last ones but I know you have a lot of information because you talked many days with many of them while I do other things you learned a lot of things we have not spoke of. Dan it is the first my mind ever thought of anything even close to this. Not an Indian in the world knows of these machines, men and equipment. We will be back and that my very special princess. We also must speak about the Pirates and what we are to do with them wanting you to come to their village and talk to their people and let them show you they still hold you in high regards because of what you did and they want to have celebration and want us to know the feel very bad if we had this celebration as the Little Town did and the Indians felt they were just as any to what had taken place. Mary we cannot turn this down but we cannot be spending too much time or we get snowed in. We should have stayed down on the flats where it never snows we 134 had no business going back up there. Dan you know that you saved many lives and now have many friends who want to thank you can you not accept that they need that giving to us for them to grow the same as the whites. After talking it over Dan decided he did want to spend some time with these Piutes and gave up the idea of leaving this area now. He would wait and decide if the move was beneficial to the total knowledge that he now felt was available to him. No one had ever befriended a Tree Man that is what he was called by these people. After Dan had moved into the village and got acquainted with those around him he learned that they had a incident with the Tree People years ago. When Chief Joseph invited Dan to attend the group fire pit where only the men of leadership in the village could attend. He found the Chief’s grandmother when a small child had been playing up in a tree one day as a small girl and when she fell she would have fallen into the river and as small as she was they figured she would have drowned. But when she fell several women were washing clothes at the time and when the baby fell many looked up and watched as she fell. They told the girl was halfway to the water when she just stopped and in mid air lay with her arms out like she had lit in someone’s lab. She was in the air with no 135 nothing to support her but she did not continue to the water she was part way between the tree and the water. Just hanging there and when the ladies started to yell and scream for others to look the young girl just floated to the bank and was set down on her feet. Many eyes to see this and many to tell the story but and not all was the same they each had to add something to what they saw so when finished the story was told for two generations and the only thing they told the same and all agreed that Tree Man had caught her and set her down. Since that day, respect and goodwill between the village and the Tree Men have continued, with numerous stories of their friendship. Since that time at the river years ago the villagers know for a fact that they can disappear and appear when they want and they have communicated many times with each generation. They know of the people from out in the clouds but it is very hard to get any information because they feel it is not to be spoke of. Dan would come back and live with these people when he returned if he did not find out right now what he wanted to know about this. Like what did the people look like? What language did they use and was it spoken out loud? Many more would come to him when he was facing one who knew. He had come to learn a lot from Ago the night they were alone and Ago was eager to talk. He not only 136 spoke it he could make me see the picture of what he was talking about. He started with telling me that those men with the big ships came here because they needed here on this place they did not have at home and this was the only place they could go to that had it always. I did not learn exactly what it was they wanted here but he was showing me bee hives and the plants where those bees were. I will have to talk more with him to learn of this and also if he had been on there ships and sailed where did they go? What did he see in the ships cabin. I would like to know what they looked like these people from the heavens. The next day was a special time for all these Tree Men not that the women don’t mount up to whatever was necessary but they we never spoke of when using the term Tree Men. But the celebration lasted three days and I could not get anyone to even think of speaking they were into celebrations only. When the celebrations were over then they had to gather certain berry that was in season and everyone got involved in gathering, and storing, these berries. As it turned out my eagerness to learn about Tree Men and men sent from heaven was over road by my deep expectations of seeing the Pacific Ocean. I had learned that name from those in a small village in California Valley. The term Pacific Ocean they claimed had been handed down for generations. Anyway, the more 137 I thought of that ocean the less I thought about the other subjects. What was it I was thinking I went into very deep thinking trying to find what I cared about those and that? There may be a reason, but for now let’s just pack up and go. With that I went to camp and together my princess had made me promise we would come back and live here awhile. But with one child, one pregnant wife and a bunch of friends we left the mountains and entering the low and much Oak Brush we left all behind.

 

INTRODUCTION

This story actually began in my mind back in about 1986 while I was living in Los Vegas
and had ran into a friend and his wife Dean and Carolyn Wright. Dean introduced me to selfhypnosis and for the first time I realized there was things out there way beyond what I had
understood. By relaxing and taking me on a more concise level or saying it another way
concentration on one subject and not allowing other thoughts to drift into my thinking process I
could achieve things I did not know were available to me.
At first I looked back at my grade school days, then before I had gone to school, next
stepping back into a life before this one and watching that. I then went to a life before that and
continued looking further and further back. Some may say this is not possible and my feeling is
anything is possible if you can believe it can be. If you do not believe in this does not mean it is
not so. Rather you believe in gravity or not have nothing to do with dropping something and having
it fall. If you can accept this book or if you can accept the possibility of a life after death this book
could enlighten you to a new world.
Upon entering a bar in Santa Cruz California back in the nineties I happen to speak to a
woman who was a physic (cannot tell you her name) and without my telling her anything she told
me I must go back to that previous life and turn the horse free. Knock me over with a feather how
could she possibly know this without my telling her I had gone back and watched as I rode a horse
up to a cabin through the rains over a railing walked into a cabin, sat at a table lowered my head
and died. She went on to tell me not only that but I knew something that I was supposed to tell
and had not said anything when it was the right thing to do. That she should tell me this was so
far beyond anything possible was more eye opening than throwing a bucket of cold water in my
face. I told her I didn’t know I could change what had happened in the past and she told me that
all I had to do was go back as I had before only this time set the horse free.
Later after thinking about all this I decided that it would be fun to tell this story. From the
very first I knew exactly how it was to end but when I began to write the story strange things began
to happen like people would say things to me that I promise I had never heard before putting them
into print. Explain that? Not me, I can’t tell you how it was in my head other than what the story
says as you read. It took me somewhere around four years to get the first two chapters acceptable
to my thoughts. Writing was never a part of my world so putting this story down on paper was
like rocket science somebody can do it but not me. Some stories are meant to be told and this is
how I feel about this one; if you were meant to read it, could be that is stranger than I was meant
to write it. Please enjoy it and also allow for an amateur playing in a professional’s world.
Verl K.

 

Chapter One

After finishing supper over the open fire Salmon is leaning back against his saddle his feet
stretched out toward the fire having that last cup of coffee before turning in for the night. The stars
overhead are brightly shining and they seemed to be saying relax and enjoy. It is a warm evening
without a breeze and the temperature couldn’t be better if he were in Gods pocket. The fire had
burnt down till there were only the coals with the snapping of wood almost in harmony with the
crickets. Pacer Salmons Roan stallion was calmly standing beside him watching the fire as if he
was the one who started it. There was never any need to hobble Pacer because he would not leave,
or if he did it was always within sight of Salmon. The bond between the two was so strong that
Pacer would not only let Salmon know of any danger but would stand and fights to protect him.
The dim light from the fire allowed the small trees and brush to be seen as though it were early
morning. He was thinking that it must be May or June because everything was so green and yet
warm. As he thought of this he laughed to himself and said out loud to Pacer “Not only do I not
know the month; I am not sure what year it is”. Kind of funny he told himself the older I get the
less it matters.
There was a disturbance Salmon could not understand and he tried to explain to it himself.
Maybe it was to quite, it seemed as though something changed, something was wrong. All this
had run though he mind in less than a heartbeat. Then he realized it was not just him, Pacer was
stomping, snorting and moving from one side of the fire the other side of Salmon. Without
realizing he had even moved he was down on one knee with a Colt 45 pointing across the fire.
Nothing to the eye but something was different, something was wrong and Pacer was not the only
one who could feel this. OK Pacer, I’m ready, calm yourself and be prepared. There was no doubt
in his mind that Pacer was ready to take on anything that could be out there.
A voice very close said “What you are about to hear will change your life forever”. The
guy can’t be five feet away Pacer and I’ll be damned if I can see him. Been a long time getting
you into a position where we could talk the voice said. Now Pacer was really kicking, stomping,
snorting and raring. “”Well it looks like you done did it”, Salmon said as he looked around trying
to locate the man doing the talking. “Now if you will step out and show yourself I can offer you
a hot cup of coffee that is if you are friendly”. If you will calm that beast down I will explain a
few things to you, the voice said. Not sure I can do that, old Pacer can smell the sweat running
down my back and when I get nervous he gets mean. Well do what you can and I will try to keep
as calm a voice as possible. All right Pacer we got him covered, calm down and quit the stomping
and carrying on for now. Pacer stopped fidgeting, threw its head back and forth snorting and then
stood very still as if he knew every word spoken to him. In fact Salmon thought he probably could,
he had raised him from a colt and they had been together night and day ever sense.
Now if you are ready the voice said I will tell you a story that will bring all this to light and
perhaps make sense to you. To begin with Salmon said you may start by explaining where you
are, I can’t see you and that makes me a little nervous. Well, put the gun away, if you can’t see
me you can’t hit me anyway and you just as well get comfortable because this is going to take a
while. Let me tell you something smart ass, Salmon said I shot this rabbit I am eating for dinner
and I would have be having duck but I shot the duck so high up in the air that by the time it hit the
ground the meat was spoiled. What bull shit the voice said with a pistol to top it off. Oh, no said
Salmon I used a rifle and just last week I shot an elk that was just a small thing, maybe two hundred
and fifty pounds, which would make good eating but it was so far away that by the time the bullet
got there the dam thing must have gained 300 pounds. “Do you mind”, Salmon said “if I pour
myself another cup of coffee”? Make yourself right to home, came the voice with all the lies you
carry around you must be damn tired anyway.
Well, the voice said, “do you believe there is a life after this one”? Never gave it much
thought was the answer. Let me put a little light to the subject then. When you die they throw the
body in a hole but that’s all that goes in the hole. How could you know… And before he could
say any more the voice said you listen and I talk, in a little bit you will have lots of questions and
I will answer them as I can but for now just try to listen.
There are a few things you must accept and a few that will make sense but if you will just
follow my reasoning we will eventually get you to an understanding. First as I said what goes into
the ground is only a body. The way you may think of this for a minute is the body is like a pair of
pants, you slip them on and ware them when they get worn you repair as necessary. The pants like
the body get old and loose the color and the hind end starts to drag. Well the body is the same you
just slip them on but when you start out as a baby you don’t remember ever having another pair.
While wearing these pants we are judged by how we act. In real life we are judged but it is similar
to dressing up on Saturday night some only see us in that light, however when we change to the
Sunday go to meeting clothes we are again judged by those. Now in real life we are judged in that
body but try to understand that looking at the big picture that body like the pants will change.
What I am telling you is right now you are Salmon and one day you will die and after leaving that
body you will put on another just like you put on a pair of pants. What goes into them is the part
I am talking about. Some call it a soul, some it is a life force, whatever it is called; it is part of the
mind or the part of us that allows us to store information and recall it when necessary. I personally
think of it as a God within us and it never dies and regardless of the life we are living the knowledge
of our existence is a part of us. When you arrive at the pearly gates as they are said to be, your
judge will not be any other than your own personal self.
What you have to understand is that you alone control your own destiny, not just in this
world as you know it but in all eternity. This may take a few minutes to think about but it really is
not very complicated. The Indians figured out years ago that we traveled from one world to another
and they buried the dead with their favorite horse or whatever, to make the journey easier. Where
they missed in their thinking was the body does not travel, the mind does, and it does not need a
horse to get there. I think you should now be to the point where you can see that after you die it
is not all over, it just starts again by putting on a new body. I am not going to get into what happens
after you die now but I will tell you that there can be a long wait to get the new body or it could
happen right away. Time is of no meaning during this stop, and for right now let’s call that the
between life’s, because it is more understandable to your way of thinking. I have watched you
several times and have come close to speaking to you however there were several reasons I did
not. One I was not sure I could talk with you and another is what would I tell you to make you
understand. Next is what would you do after I left and had told you all this. My guess would be
to tell a friend and then they would think you were crazy and I would not have accomplished a
thing.
Now that you have accepted this let me continue. “Who the hell said I accepted any of this
crock of bull?” Salmon said. After a few chuckles the voice said there are a few things here that
you have not been told and right now would be a good time to give you one. I can read your mind
just as easy as you can. Everything you think I immediately know, so let’s just take the bull by
the horns and just get on with it. The reason I came to you is very simple. I was you in the last
life. Saying it another way Salmon when you die the next body you choose will be mine. Holy
jumped up Jesus now I know I have gone off the deep end. That rabbit I eat for dinner has gone
through the system and turned to shit in a hurry. Won’t have to worry about me telling anybody
because only the nuts listen to this and they wouldn’t believe a word. Pacer may not even listen
to me after tonight. I can just imagine what people would say if I told them I sat down to dinner
one night and you would not believe who came to my camp fire. I’ve got it now. I am such a
damn good cook I bring em out of the grave to eat with me. I’ve not had a drink in quite a while
but only because I ran out, but if I had a bottle now would be as good a time as I have ever heard
of. Lots of people talk to themselves and it in understandable being out here by yourself but this
is beyond that. I’m not sure if I want you to leave or not, if I am left with this to think about I may
put on a dress and go to church. One thing the voice said that I have figured out is I can’t leave
you till there is no doubt in your mind as to exactly what is going on here.

 

Chapter Two
Salmon it is very important that you understand and know for sure that this is not your
imagination or that you are not dreaming this. I have had a long time to study on this and have
tried to figure what questions you will have or what you would believe of this and have come to
the conclusion that the best way to approach this is to allow your mind to wonder and ask as many
questions as necessary to satisfy yourself. Now that I have gave you the basic information we can
build on that.
OK what is your name? If we are going to talk I have to have something to call you. Right
on my name is Verl. Sounds like a stupid name to me. Well in most places Salmon is not acutely
dragging the gals toward the barn either.
All right Verl do we look alike? Salmon this is real easy to understand if you stop and
think about it. You have the appearance of either one or both of your parents, now I have the same
thing but our parents are from a different time and not related so there for we cannot possibly look
alike. Are minds are one and the same however remember the pants I talked about what goes in
them is the same but the pants are not the same.
What is your last name Verl? It could not matter less; we are not checking genealogy here
Salmon. Not only that how many people do you know that have changed their names for one
reason or the other? Point well taken Verl but most of them do it because of problems with the
law. Do you have problems? No Salmon I don’t but neither does you, however we are not related
physically so to speak. Now this is going to take a few minutes to think about. I am not related to
myself there for when I look in the mirror I am not looking at me then who the hell am I looking
at? Never mind let’s not go there.. Salmon that statement is stupid. Now that has got to be a great
line if ever there was I tell myself how stupid a question then I attempt to answer it. Well Verl
you have had forever to think about this here thing and here I set talking to myself and getting
answers from somebody else. I bet I am the only guy in the world that can go out in the woods all
by himself and have a meeting with two, no make that three gota count Pacer.
Say if you can do all this would you give me a new saddle? Salmon I am not a Genie to
grant wishes and such. Just try to understand what is going on here this is not that hard to
understand and you have to get a handle on it.
Except for driving me crazy just why did you show up here tonight? This has got to be the
dumbest of dumb visits ever. Well Salmon that is a very good statement and one we have to talk
about. It turns out that when you die you will have some information that you were supposed to
share with others and you didn’t do it. Another thing you did was to leave Pacer and not care for
him as you should have. Please explain that to me Verl, Pacer is my best friend why would I do
something like that? When you leave your horse somewhere he will stand and wait for you to
return and will not move is that not the truth? Yes! He will stand at my back door when he sees
me go in and not leave till I come back out or at least be close enough to see the door. Well you
went into a cabin knowing you were going to die and left his rains over a railing and he would
stand there till he was too weak to walk, waiting for you. And that is exactly what you did.
Let’s try to go forward from here and let me try to advance your thinking to the point to
truly understand there is life after death. What other questions do you have that prevent you from
this accepting this idea? Is there a God Verl? You took longer to get to this question than I
expected but I knew it would be coming. To give an honest answer it is no I have not personally
saw him. I have saw Gods Light as it is called and it is something to remember as not everyone
gets to see it. Life after death causes one to dwell on the possibilities that between life and death
we must meet God. In truth each time we go through life we are expected to advance a little closer
to God but we don’t do it in one or two trips normally. Winter follows summer and again we have
winter are they not the same question? Life follows death and is followed by life. God gives us
the answer to these questions over and over again and we just don’t want to hear. If I tell you that
gun you have is not a 45 you would argue that it is. If I persist that it is not you will continue to
defend your opinion of it being a 45 Colt. The only thing that would make you mad about the
subject would be that I would argue continually till you got mad. If we ask a religious scholar
about God and they were to get mad it would make one wonder why they got mad if it were for
the same reason. They get mad because you don’t believe as they do and can’t see their point. If
they were as sure of their point as you are that it is a Colt 45 why should they get mad by my
asking?
What I am doing here Salmon is getting you to see that you have all the information to
make that call the same as we all do. Why you decide to ask me is the same as asking a man of
the cloth. He has no more information than you do. God gives us that and we only have to turn
to our self to know the answer. But Verl you have died and came back you should know more
than I do. Salmon you have died and came back did you think you were the first one here? No,
but you are in a different century than me and talking to me in another that should change
something. Salmon let me try a different way. A rain cloud comes over a mountain and one of
those rain drops falls directly on the top and it splits and half goes down one side of the mountain
and the other goes the other side. One rain drop travels over a gold nugget the other travels over
a lump of coal. They are both from the same place when they are joined at the ocean after traveling
several rivers. On the journey if you were to ask each one a question the answer would not be the
same. Salmon your journey is different than mine even though we came from the same place and
will end up in the same place our travels are different. Said another way we are what we are. God
has given us a book called the Bible which he has made available to everyone. Those that want
will read those that do not know how to read will learn through others eyes but God created this
book guided the translation of it and keep it from harm’s way for hundreds of years. Stop and
think about that when he made the book he gave it to all of us and those that doubt it should
understand he was capable of creating it and translating it and don’t for a second think he did not
have the power to see to itstruth and that it carried his words. What I am saying is all the questions
you are asking have the answers in the bible and have been made available without me. Not to
mention you can speak to him anytime and anywhere you should decide you want to.
Verl why are you going into the part about the bible and all so much? Sal I’m trying to
give you some valuable information. If you were my son and I had to leave on an extended trip
and were worried about you the one thing I could do is to make sure someone is to watch over you.
I may ask you to go over to the friend’s house and live with them till I got back and I may tell you
to treat them just like you would me or your mother. While you were there I may leave you a list
of things I want you to do until I get back, like feed the chickens and milk the cows. Now if my
hand was hurting and I couldn’t write it out I may ask a few other to help so maybe Matthew, Mark
or Luke would write it for me but I would be watching and make sure it was what I wanted you to
know. When I got home and found the chores had not been done I might ask you why they were
not completed. You didn’t know I left you a note? Look me in the eye and tell me that you were
not told every Sunday morning to read what I left for you. Well Sal that is what is called the Bible
and it is just about as I said only God has a more to say and more people to say it to but the lesson
is not any different. Take this as something to know and learn as you work your way through life.
I believe I have accomplished what my first visit here was for. I will return in a few days.
This next part is the tuff part of it all, for me. I have to come back after today, not before, lest you
would know not who I am. If I wait too long you will be dead and we cannot accomplish anything.
May I ask you Verl what is the purpose of your visit? Good question Salmon my idea is
to have you leave something that I can retrieve and prove I have talked with you and all of this is
real and has happened. Also with my knowledge of what is to come for you, said another way I
can tell you the future and we should be able to profit from it both financially and historically.
Now Salmon while I am gone I want you to try and not tell others what happened here at least not
for a while just think about it and try to understand what I have told you.
You could help me return here if you could at least tell me what it looks like around us
more than what I can see right here. You found me once and now you have doubt you can do it
again? What I am saying Salmon is where we are in relation to the rest of the world so when you
leave me something I know where to look for it, as to finding you I didn’t have to worry where
you were. Well Verl the first thing to know is it is flatern a squaw track and not a tree in sight. I
brought a tree and put it next to the ranch house and it was two weeks before we could get to the
house without wadding through all the dogs in the county that were standing around waiting for
their turn. Boss made me dig it up and get rid of it.
Well this is the first of what I think will be many visits and I have my own problems to
deal with. Damn Verl how much time do I have? I don’t think you want to know that right now
and if you decide you want to know I will tell you all the details but life is limited know that. Bye
Sal. So long you good looking, smart intelligent guy. Don’t get carried away just because you are
talking to yourself.

 

Chapter Three
Half-awake I feel something pushing against my shoulder. As I begin to wake up I realize
this has been going on for several minutes and it is Pacer pushing me. Pacer stop that I am awake
now, cut it out. As I gain conciseness and become fully awake almost instantly it seems I can hear
the clatter of a horse approaching. Pulling on my hat I begin to pull on my boots as the horse pulls
to a stop and I hear a familiar voice. Sal; What are you doing in bed at this time of day? The sun
will be up any minute and look at you. What do you mean in bed John? I just sat down to take
some rocks out of my boot that must have gotten in this morning. Going over to the fire John feels
the coals and says, “Just as I expected like hell you’ve been up”. You haven’t even had coffee yet
the fire is still cold from last night”. See how long I have been up; the thing has got cold while out
running around. Sal you damn liar you haven’t even had coffee yet and you still got pixy dust in
your eyes.
John did you ride all the way out here to make sure I was up, to argue or to pay back that
five dollars you owe me. Sal I have never owed you anything in my life and if you could collect
everything you have ever earned and everything everyone has ever owed you you wouldn’t come
up with three dollars. John did anyone ever tell you that you are real hard to digest before lunch?
Sal, why do you come way up here all by yourself when you have so many friends down
at the ranch who would like to spend time with you and listen to all those lies? Well John up here
I get a chance to visit with the smartest best looking guy I know and never have anyone doubt me.
Pacer sometimes doesn’t like my singing but he warns me when trouble arrives and stands here
just waiting to be of service. Well John now that you have rode all this way and caused all the
commotion you can, what are you up to? Sal, I caused the commotion to get even, but the reason
I am here is twofold. But first tell me why a guy who gets up with the stars still shining is still in
bed in the middle of the day are you feeling sickly? Being my best friend has its advantages in
fishing and hunting but some things are just too hard to explain, John. Try me just one time with
the big picture and if I can’t understand the framing we will let er go. OK John I was up all night
talking with myself. Hell Sal, you don’t have to stay up for that you can do that any day all day
long. Not only that I thought you said someone smart who knew something was around here to
talk with. Don’t get smart or I will give you a lump to go with the coffee this morning. And we are
going to let it drop for now. So tell me what you are here for.
All right Sal; you were down at the river the day the stage got held up and everyone knows
it. They should John; I had to help pull the stage out of the river and damn near drowned doing
er. They know that Sal but the Sheriff wants to talk with you about it, he seems to think that if
you were up on the ridge where you had to have been to get down there in time to help, and then
you had to have seen everything that happened. He wants you to come in and explain the story
and tell him who did it because he sure figures you know. Does he think I had something to do
with it John? No; Sal he is sure you are not involved but he says that with your help he can put
those that did it away real fast. He just wants you to come it and tell him the story and fill in the
missing pieces.
Yes John I can see why he would want me to explain that; now you said there was two
reasons for coming up here what is the other one? The preacher was asking those who knew you
if they could induce you to come to church. John I am not sure if I want to be induced by a
preacher. It sounds to me like he is tired of little boys and wants me. Tell him I am not one to be
induced by him or anybody else. No; Sal that is not what he means let me explain it to…Stop..Don’t
go any further John I don’t want to hear it..But Sal you don’t understand…Oh! But I understand
more than I want to John, now you go tell the Preacher to forget it.
Salmon now that I have told you when do you figure on coming back to the ranch? Well
John I noticed you called me Salmon; from experience I know that with Sal we are friends but
with Salmon you are trying to get me to do something that either you don’t want or I don’t want
and maybe both, which is it? OK Sal I have a problem in my mind as to your meeting with the
Sheriff for several reasons. Number one he’s a Wheaner and I don’t trust them Wheaners one
little bit.. Number two is why doesn’t he come up here and talk with you; he can ride a horse just
like the rest of us and it is not that far and he would have you all by himself… Number three why
does he want to make a big deal out of the meeting; what I mean is why doesn’t he want to meet
you alone? Sal we all know you are fast and a damn good shot and that may have something to
do with the chicken livered Sheriff. What did he send me up here for and not come his own self?
Did you ask him that John? Ya! I did but he just told me that sense we are friends and he was busy
that he could use my help on this.
Sal my gut tells me he knows more about this than he is letting on to and wants to find out
all he can from you as to rather to do anything or not. Why do you say that John? Sal everyone
knows that Sheriff Wheaner’s sister has been dating Tom the stage coach driver for months and
anything that happens on the stage the Sheriff hears about it that night. When should I tell the
Sheriff to expect you? John you tell the Sheriff that he knows Pacer but just in case he forgets I
will put a bell on him. Now when he sees him or hears the bell, well you tell him to watch for his
head and tell him I will be right behind it by just a few feet.
Before you go would you like to stick around long enough to have a cup of coffee? No Sal
I think I will get back and get a few things done around the place that I have not taken time to do
lately. Thanks now I don’t need a lump but just the same next time I will try to get here just after
lunch just to make sure you are up. Don’t let the dust settle in your boots going, John. Why are
you being rude, when I am such a nice guy? Ya! Like a salesman with a gift, most times what
they sale costs less than what they are giving away. Have to make payments on the gift, just like
a politician all wind and no storm. Besides John I have a lot of thinking to do about what I was
talking to myself about. As you know I get a little messed up inside and if I don’t get away and
have a little time to myself. I have to kind of buildup strength to put up with those do gooders in
town that think they know some thun and if I don’t I may start to act like you.

Chapter Four
Well Pacer looks like we finally get a chance to do a little thinking without any help. First
thing comes to mind was what Verl said about the things you are going to hear will change your
life forever. Now that is one hell of a line if there ever was one. If he is real, that would change
things big time and if he is not that to would also change things. I believe I was smart in not telling
John about the visit because he would have spread it all over the ranch like a snow storm and been
so deep I couldn’t walk through it. I would never have heard the end of it. Pacer even you must
have heard Verl because you were as jumpy as I was. The big question is where do we go from
here? I suspect that at this point we should just play like it never happened because there is nothing
we can do about it now and it is not like we have a decision to make. That is just what we will do
and now is a good time to forget it. He says he doesn’t look like me and he seemed to know a lot
of stuff that he should not have known. Let’s just forget it, shall we? Now what will we say if he
shows up again?
Verl said he would have trouble getting back here seems like if he done it once he could
do it again. If he were not real, how did I learn his name? Think about that stuff he said about life
is like changing pants. We are in this body and when we wear it out we just go get another one.
Wonder if we get to pick it out Pacer? If we can pick it out I want to come back as a girl built just
like a shit house. My luck I would be a damn squaw and have to do all the work anyway. Will
have to ask him if we get to pick it out or if we are told what we will be? Say if that is the case
maybe I will be coming back as a horse. Old Sheriff Wheaner almost made it he got the back end.
Makes me smile the banker ol Smithy he must have been a mule as stubborn as he is and he must
have been raised on a bitter bush.
Many things I never even thought to ask when he was standing here. How could I ask
when I have never thought about life after death in my whole get together? When I die will I be
able to see my dad again? How about Mom? How old would they be? Dad died at 52 will he still
be that age are will he be older? Wonder if he will be playing the violin or the fiddle like the
preacher talks about? Sure would be funny seeings as he couldn’t abide by them while he was here.
Why would a guy want to die and go to heaven like the Preacher says when he don’t like to hear
violins now and he expects us to look forward to that? Seems like if they want you to be good the
preacher should be bragging about free whiskey, big fishing holes full of trout and green pastures
with trees to lean agin. Would be a lot easier for a feller to turn the other cheek if he knew you
got the best fish’n hole and the longest pole.
He seemed to know lot about death and what happens later. He said that we knew
everything that happens in this life after we die. That makes sense if you think about it Pacer if
you lie down and die only thing happens is you don’t live anymore. But what difference does it
make when you are dead you can’t do anything about it anyway. Say somebody shot you…Oh I
get what he meant if somebody shot me he would have to face me and explain why he had done
it. Now what do I get to do about it if he is dead. I can’t kill him again if he is dead. Wonder if I
can stomp him in the mud? Wonder if they got any mud in heaven?
Well I better get my stuff together got to be back at the ranch in a few hours and should
ride over to the see the sheriff if I can. You know Pacer that really did look kind of like old Sheriff
Wheaner that robbed the stage the other day and those with him I know I should be able to put a
name to. If I go talk to the Sheriff and he figures out I may know I am in real trouble and if I don’t
go see him he will think I know and that will be real trouble. Maybe that is why Verl is coming
around to see me. Damn Pacer do you think my number has been called? Well by damn if that
Sheriff is going to shoot me I am not going to let him get away free. I could go to town and shoot
him. Would you rather be hung for shooting the Sheriff or shot by the Sheriff?
Don’t really matter where I go trouble just seems to follow me. Got that damn big black
cloud hanging over me rather I am here or anywhere else. Wonder if Verl has this problem? I will
have to ask him when I see him again. Had better ask him about the Sheriff also and see if he says
he knows what is going to happen and if what he says is real then he should have a good idea sense
he has gone through this. Not much matters when you look er in the eye like this does it Pacer?
If I would have mined my own business the day the stage was robbed I would not be in this pickle.
Then I would have to worry about what happened to those in the stage, of course had I known that
nobody was in it and only Wheaner’s about to be brother in law was the stage driver things may
have gone different.

 

Chapter Five
Just as well gather a little wood and get things together before it gets dark. I will start the
fire now and get supper over before dark that way I can enjoy a few minutes of rest and relaxing
before turning in. Get out of my way Pacer you don’t have to get under my feet to hear me I will
talk plenty loud to hear. Notice how I put the small wood in the bottom and then pile the bigger
wood on it? Now I want you to pay attention because when I get old this will be your job. Better
pay real close attention to my lighting the fire because I have no idea how you will do this. Pacer
starts to scratch the ground with a front hoof just to show he knows what is being said. Ya! You
are one smart horse if there ever was one; nobody would believe you understand me like you do.
Just look out there at that beautiful valley with the sun dropping behind that horizon. Keep your
nose out of the skillet if you don’t want it burnt. Don’t be looking at that coffee pot horses don’t
drink that stuff. Mutton grease hot, now we add a little flour, throw in a little prairie chicken, a
few wild onions, little salt and pepper mix and let er cook. Sure wish I had an egg but when this
flour gets cooked we’ll have bread holding the chicken together like a cow in the mud. Now Pacer
we have old Salmons stew and coffee fit for a king and feed for a fool.
Don’t be stampen and whinnying just because you don’t….. Hold it…. I feel what you are
scared of now. Damn it’s the brains of the world but next time you come up will you please start
whistling and let me know you’re coming. I thought Pacer was trying to tell me how bad my supper
looked. Hello Salmon it would be hard to tell you how long it took me to get here this Time.
What’s the matter Verl loose the road map? I was worried it would be tuff and it was harder than
ever to do this time. How I get here is really only a matter of mind control so it should not be that
tuff but Sal, can I call you that? Ya! Verl guess you can my friends do and it appears that you
should be right up there with the closest friend possible. Anyway Sal I lean back close my eyes
and focus on you and then I have to kind of guess the year and you didn’t know so I kind of like
stated at 1860 and just rolled around till I found you here then had to listen to figure if I was after
last time or before. You really didn’t give me much to go on because I know you are up here at
this location as often as you can and ramble around with Pacer like a forgotten fold in a forest fire.
And how deeee do to you to Verl. Slop the hogs and wash the dishes wish the world was
full funny fishes. Now that you are here we can start a new club we can call it the secret meeting
of me and my and the President will be one of us depending on how the voting goes. Of course I
speak to count the votes because that guy is worth more than a banker. I have thought about our
situation quite a bit and I have come to the conclusion that you know a lot about me but I know
nothing about you or what the future is to bring. So what I would like to do is pour a cup of coffee
and just set down here and have you raddle on and tell me what the future is going to be like.
Now Sal that is exactly what I would like to do but there are so many subjects that I could
go into and many of them are so far over what you could understand that I feel like a God. I know
things to come and things that will happen and most of them can’t be of any advantage to you to
know. I can tell you that we will have a man on the moon we will have things that you can carry
in a shirt pocket and talk to anyone who has one anywhere in the world at any time. We have air
planes that will allow you to go from where you are to the great sea in the East and still be in
California before supper. We have hand guns that will shoot twenty shots in a second and we can
look and talk to someone anywhere on the face of the earth. You could talk to someone in Germany
and look at them at the same time dose that seem impossible Sal?
All this stuff you talk about is it real? A man on the moon? How did he get there? How
long did it take? What was that air thing you were talking about? Sal I don’t think this is going
to do you any good at all. I have thought it over and can’t see how it can benefit you to any
purpose. Then why did you bring it up? Maybe to impress you or maybe to let you know that
what I am saying is true. I don’t really know why. But I will tell you that man does build a
machine that will travel at speeds on the ground faster than 200 miles per hour but mostly they
stay at around 70 miles per hour. The roads you are traveling are gravel but they will eventually
be asphalt which is rock with oil in it and it packs real hard and the water runs off. Be like being
on a rock? Yes, Sal it would be and in the big Cities if they use horses they but rubber shoes on
them. What’s rubber? Wow! Sal there are several things you have yet to see, Rubber and plastic
but we will explain those in time. I believe rubber has been around before you but you are just not
familiar with it.
Verl what are we going to do with all this information? You said last time here that you
had a plan of some kind. Please explain it to me what is going to happen. Well Sal the way I see
it is I can give you a little information to maybe make you a few bucks and you can hide something
that I can find. I will tell the world about you and prove I have been in communications with you.
Communication? What is that? Sorry Sal I will try to use smaller words, ones that you are familiar
with. But communication is for two people to talk to each other, to communicate is to trade
information. Seems to me that the way to prove you are talking to me would be to bring a friend
with you Verl. Sal I have spent years leaning how to get to here I have no idea how to bring a
friend. It would be easier to teach you how to come to my time than it would be to teach someone
how to follow me in time and be here at the same time. I could teach them how to do this but I am
not sure I could teach them how to speak when they get here. That just kind of happened on a trip
one time and I knew that it was possible after that.
Verl I could write on a tree or something like that. No Sal a tree usually don’t last over a
hundred years and it blow over or anything. Got to come up with a better idea than that. How
about I dig a grave and put something in it for you to find and then I could have a grave marker
that should last a long time and nobody messes with a grave.
I can see it now; I will show up at the Cemetery with a shovel over my shoulder and tell
them at the front gate: Me? OH! I am just going over and dig up a grave that is one hundred and
fifty years old. Who’s in it? Just me. I left a couple of things in a hurry and wanted to stop by
and pick them up. Sal, they don’t let you go in and dig a grave up and if they caught me there I
would be locked in a padded cell and feed bread crumbs and salty water for eternity.
Seems as though I spent a lot of time trying to get here and not enough time on how this is
to work out. But I am sure with the two of us it can’t be that hard to figure out.. I was down on
the Colorado River one time and went into Butch Cassidy and the Sun Dance Kids hide out and
that had to be this old. First thing we have to do is figure out just where you are right now. Sal
you must have a pretty good idea where you are. Tell me what you know.
When I first came here this was all a territory and it was called unorganized even though
many people are excited about it those of us that are new here or just workers could care less. The
kids want to go to all the chin digs just so they can get out of work. The women like it because
they get to put on their Sunday go to meeting dresses and fix lunch baskets and go talk to each
other like a bunch of chickens in the barn yard.
I do believe that where I am right now it is called or will be called Kansas but I don’t know
for sure because they are others that say they don’t know where the lines are. Every time you hear
a story you get another side of it, not sure if this is going to be Kansas for sure and it may already
be. I passed Kansas City after spending a couple of days there but will tell you the killings and
robberies were more than an honest man could stand. Some of those wanted to do away with
drinking saying it was a sin others was trying to do away with the ladies of the night because that
was a sin, others wanted guns taken away and would you believe they were trying to pass a law
that you had to attend church to live there. Even God would have had to change his ways to live
in Kansas City was what some were saying. Seemed like every day you could find someone up
on the soap box wanting you to repent and pay them to spread the word. Ya! For only a few dollars
you can buy your way into heaven, stop drinking, stop gambling and give your money to God and
save your soul. Of course you have to be careful which God because when the Mormons came
through here they claimed they had found God so these people ran them out. The object here is to
look but don’t get to close not that they had found him but those that were looking didn’t want to
be told you found him either. Little humor here because you could get your head cut off with the
Mormons just as easily if you acted like you were going to get too close to God without being
dipped in their pool. Had to step right in Kansas so I stepped right fast and right on through the
place and took my God with me. Been a lot of places in my time but none that were any more fun
or more dangerous than there. Had three dollars and thirty seven cents when I got there and left
riding Pacer and a worn out welcome a few days later. Followed the river out of town for a couple
of days eating fish, fowl and feathers till my hat fit again without hurting. Damn rot gut they
served was good going down good but by morning the cows were crowing, the chickens were
chewing and the ladies were, well you get the point.
Went on to Topeka and got a job unloading potatoes on a steamboat at the landing there.
Didn’t know there were that many potatoes in the world. We had bags of potatoes, boxes of
potatoes bins full of potatoes I carried so many potatoes that I couldn’t look a potato in the eye for
months. Can’t remember how long or how many boats I worked on but by the time I finally said
no more I had earned five dollars and twenty seven cents and thought I was walken in tall cotton.
I was an unusually strong guy I stood six foot tall in my socks and they were full of holes at the
time. I had shoulders wide as a Texas Long Horn and a waste the size of a prairie dog hole. My
hands were use to hard work but when I left those ships I could carry three hundred pounds of
potatoes up a gang plank and through them on a wagon two feet above my head and then turn and
go get some more. Must have weighed about 220 at that time and if there was any fat you couldn’t
find it. Not many men stood up to me in those days with anything short of kind words and good
advice. In fact that brings to mind the night before leaving Topeka I had stopped in for a beer and
a fellow in the place offered all the beer you could drink if you could whip this big guy that was
standing there. I walked up to the guy and ask if he was serious and he said I sure am and I hit
him. I think he expected it to last longer and I wanted to drink so I guess you could say we each
got what we wanted. I drank a beer for every potato I carried or at least I tried to. The next
morning the fellow I hit found me and told me he had a head ache I had hit him so hard. I told
him we were even then because I also had a head ache, said if he would have gotten up and knocked
me out I would have felt better today. Left him in front of a meat package place and bid him fare
well. I continued out of town following the river but I wanted to go west and the river had its own
mind so we parted company and I tipped my old hat and bid it fare thee well. Followed a road for
about a week that never varied very far from going straight west. Passed a few stage coaches and
a many wagons but can’t remember much as to anything more than a few houses with may be a
store or two. Seems like every town had a cemetery along the edge of town but nothing to help
with where I am. Finally found this here ranch that needed a hand and I had two so we agreed on
room and board and a dollar a week. He told me he hoped he could to afford to feed me because
of my size he figured I would be an eater.
First morning there I eat eight eggs, four stakes, and a dozen biscuits, half of pound of
butter and then he sat out those potatoes and I cut the four eyes out one then cut it in half. He ask
how come a man my size can eat half a cow but was so dainty on the spuds? So I told him about
my last job and figured I had done good considering. Any way after a pot or two of coffee we
proceeded to the back forty to look at the range stock and I am still here.
Then you are East of Denver and West of Topeka that only takes in a little over 500 miles
so we are getting close now if you are sure you are in Kansas we can take that distance off between
Denver and the Kansas State line which would have been about one hundred and fifty miles so
now we are down to 350 miles or so. Ever hear of Fort Hayes, Sal? Yes I have and I believe it is
west of me a day or so but it is really not a fort but a bunch of tents. Now we are really doing
some good, would you call a day fifty miles? Ya fifty to seventy miles is about right. Now we
are talking you are about one hundred and fifty miles West of Topeka Kansas. Now let’s try to
pin down the North and South directions. Any rivers in the area? Ya the Smoky is just South of
us. You must be close to Bunker Hill then or maybe you call it the Butterfield Overland stage
station. No nothing out here by that name but we are South of the Saline River a little ways. Have
you heard of a stage station? No nothing out here but there are station most places but we are
South of the Saline River a little ways. Now after all this time to finally get around to telling me
something I can use. You are in Russell County Kansas and I will have to do some research but
you are close to Bunker Hill rather they have named it yet or not I will find out. OK Sal I am
going and I will be back in touch with you in the meantime if you get a chance to get a few
Centslavery Penny’s grab them. It is a penny made in 1860 and it says on it, “Not one cent for
slavery”. We just as well start getting a war chest together now.

 

Chapter Six
Can you hear me Sal? Yes! Oh mighty one don’t turn me into salt I will obey. I thought
you left before I went to bed. I did leave Sal I have been gone for months thinking this over. Man
Verl the time sure flies for you because you have not been gone seven hours in fact are you sure
what you are saying? Of course I am sure but obviously I have missed the return by several days.
I thought I had gave you time to think this over. O.K. so what we do now is you try to find that
penny and hide it where I can find it and we will talk later. Verl I think what I will do is go down
by the river and find a large boulder high as possible from the river and put something under it.
Maybe what I Should do is go on West to that big gully; when I was there it was so big you could
hardly jump it on a horse now I understand they changed the name to the Grand Canyon and it got
a lot deeper and wider from all the rains. Sal it’s hard enough to think this out with honest answers
so try to stay on our subject. Verl you go to the river just north of where I am now and look for a
big rock and you will find it, that is if I can find this penny if not I will just put a different coin
there. Just a minute we have to figure out how I can prove you put it there for me. What’s the
difference if I put a skunk there if you can’t find it? Sal you will have to write something on it and
say to “To Verl from Salmon 1880”. They would still say it was to somebody else Verl, that I
knew. How would that prove it was to you? OK then you will have to say “To Verl born in 1942”
Wow I was born in 1842 is that strange or what? OK “To Verl who is born in 1942 from Salmon,
dated 1880”. Sounds good to me what about you? Great Verl. What shall I write in on? Can you
write on a rock? Little problem here Verl I can’t write on anything. Never learned how. Wow!
Never figured on this problem. Would you like to learn Sal? Yes but how you going to do that?
Well I know you have to learn your ABC’s so I could start there but will be tuff sense I don’t know
how to write it for you. Let’s try this get a two foot long stick Sal. OK now what? Place the stick
on the ground and start by pulling it to you…slow now turn it and make a circle.. OK now go back
down next to the circle that’s it now turn away from the circle. Stop. That is a small “A” look at
it and do you have anything to write with. Verl that is stupid why would someone who doesn’t
know how to write carry that stuff? All right then we are going to stop right here and when you
get to town you buy a pencil and some paper. What do I use for money? My looks? Walk up and
tell them you will tell them who the next president will be after Lincoln. How’s that Verl. Tell
the guy running the place that you will give him five dollars if you are wrong but if you are right
he must give you credit for four dollars today. You’re sure this will work Verl? Sal how can I be
wrong? Of course I am right. Tell them Andrew Johnson will be President. Abraham Lincoln
will be shot while still holding office. If this is right they may lock me up for the shooting or for
helping how else would I know? Tell em you have a crystal ball. Ya and my mother is a virgin.
This could turn out bad for me I don’t even like the sound of it. Can’t we find a better way? You
could leave out the part about the president getting shot and just tell who the next president will
be. Seems to me Sal that if you can do that they should pay ten dollars to one that you are wrong.
How much is Pacer worth? Woa now Verl I will not risk Pacer on a bet. This is not a risk Sal I
know for a fact that Lincoln gets shot and the vice president takes office. Just see what kind of bet
you can get and tell him you want credit now and he gets the interest profit till it happens. Man if
this works Verl we can go on the road and make lots of money telling the future. That is the very
thing I have been trying to tell you Sal. Now I will leave you and you go do what you can.
Just a minute there what is this thing I have written on the ground? It is a small A and it is
the first letter in Apple or answer or anything that starts with an “a”. Why do you call it a small
a? Well we are going to get over my head here in a minute but a large or capitol “A” is for a
person’s name. The first letter is always a capitol or called a large “A”. What’s that look like?
Get a hold of that stick again. Now pull down and off to your left a little now go back where you
started and do it again going the other direction. Make it look like the roof of a barn on steeper.
OK now do it again. Ya that is it. Now look at that a minute. That is an “A” and I want you to
say it. “A” hows that Verl? Great now make the little “A” I showed you. Now look at those to
they are both a’s and they are both said the same way. How long at this rate will it take me to learn
to read? Let’s see Sal it is about May 1880? Close as I can tell Verl. Well if we can stay with it
and you don’t have to go back to work I can have you saying the abc’s by the time snow settles in
the Gulf of Mexico. Does it snow down there? Not to my knowledge but somehow teaching a
man 40 or so years old is a lot slower than we may have time for. I do believe we need to think
this over and find another way to do it. Do you know anyone who can read Sal? Yes. Who? My
mother read a little. Is she still alive? No she died several years ago. What good would she do
then? You ask if I knew anyone who could read, didn’t you? My hell Sal you should have been
an attorney you are dumb enough to pass the test and think just like one. Why don’t you try to
think of someone who is alive that can read and would be willing to help us solve this problem.
After supper tonight when we are all setting around the table I will tell them I was talking to my
horse today and he said I was to find someone who could read and was willing to spend a little
time with me hiding something that is to be found in one hundred and fifty years from now. Say
that was said as a joke but why couldn’t we make a container with several people involved and
burry something that is to be dug up at a certain time? I could ask at the supper table but don’t
expect these guys to jump on something like that. Why would a bunch of guys who can’t make it
from pay day to pay day without borrowing money burry anything? Hell most of em would come
back later when no one was looking a dig it up for two bits. I think the grave idea is better. I
could put a marker down “Here lies my wife at last.” Nobody would touch that. How about “here
lies my wife cold as winter and warm as ever”. Sal have you ever been married? No. Well I can
see why with that kind of outlook on women. Well Verl I can’t see why you would be afraid to go
into the cemetery and dig up a grave. Things change over the years Sal and I promise that to do
that would not be in the possibilities of things. I think we had better think this over. I will be back
and see if you can think of something or if you can find a spot that has a possibility of lasting. So
long great sounds in the sky I will await your thunder as always.
He seems to think that we can just stick it under a bush and it will be hanging there when
he comes around looking for it. Must be the longer we are around or the more times we are here
so he says, our brains must shrink and twirl till everything we see appears like a barber poll and
just stand out like an apple waiting to be plucked off the bush. Comon Pacer we will go down by
the river and like the song says we will meet at the river. Here we are and it is so small the guy
who named it must have had a rope around his neck and his eyes poped out making everything
look bigger. Anywhere you want to go this would not be called a river it may be called a creek or
maybe a ditch but a river? Now look here will you there is a perfect spot if ever there was, that
rock outcropping must be all of thirty feet high and with those great big boulders between it and
the water we can dig a little hole very easy because the ground looks very soft. Will be very easy
for any old fart to find this when I get done. I will dig down about two feet and put in a few do
dads to get him started would put in a coin like I said but haven’t had one in a long time. You wait
right here Pacer and I will holler when I am ready. I will walk on down there with my shovel and
see how it goes. This is as easy as can be considering I haven’t had much practice digging anything
but an occasional post hole. OK Pacer get down here and we will get this job done with. First I
will put a flat rock in the bottom to lay the stuff on then I can put this stuff down there. My belt
buckle should stay a long time and here is a leather pouch that should last a while if it stays dry. I
can put a few small things in it like this bone ring made out of Indian something or other. Got this
colored rock that I have been keeping for good luck which hasn’t worked so it should go anyway.
Like a rabbits foot not very lucky for the rabbit. Never did find that penny he wanted but hell he
says it just came out this year so it’s no wonder I have not saw it. Now I will put another rock on
top and tamp the dirt down real solid so it will not get any water. Here Pacer walk back and forth
over this and pack it down. Cut that out don’t you know what I want here like this I will walk on
it first then you follow. Hey you are not even watching me you have got to keep an eyeball on the
thing if you are going to ever amount to anything.
Ah hell Sal I am standing right where you were and they must have brought in some big
equitpment and got ride of it because there is no high cliff and no big rocks it is as flat as the top
of a table and just a few bushes along the river here and it is not much different today than it was
in your day maybe a little less water but not anything to brag on. We will have to find another
place and try again. Thanks for the try I will be in touch. Ados Verl.
This is where we enter the part about sal looking for a burring spot

 

Chapter Seven
Taking several deep breaths I find myself back into the front room of my house here in the
Bay Area. The candle I have been watching has very little wax melted so I must not have been
gone as long as I thought I was. Looking around the room I am wondering if I should try to tell
Salmon of the T.V.? How could he possibly understand? Looking further around the room with
a counter between the kitchen and the front room I can see the refrigerator, microwave, phone, and
speakers on the counter, coffee pot, stove, damn, these are all beyond him and they are everyday
items to me. I pick up the phone and call my travel agent and tell her I want a ticket to Hays
Kansas or as close as I can be and a small car, a motel room and a map of the area. Leave the
return date open and tell the motel it will be around a week because I have known idea when I will
be returning. I do not have to leave in a hurry so I do not want to pay more just book me and let
me know when I will be leaving. Now that is taken care of I can return to my own world getting
out my lap top and making a few notes as to the response I got and what I thought of the meeting.
Better make a map of my own showing the river and what it looks like.
Working for myself and owning my own corporation had many disadvantages but this was
in my favor I could take time off because I was not working at the time. I had paid for all equipment
and had already lain off all employees because of lack of work so I had plenty of time. It only
took President Obama four months to shut me down and since I could not draw unemployment it
mattered not rather I was in Kansas or California. Shall I tell him we have a black president? Can
you imagine what he will think when they have not started the Civil War yet and the blacks are
still slaves? This is going to be a hard pill for them to swallow. I will especially enjoy telling him
of my friends who are black and have white wives and working right alongside of us in the
construction business. I wonder what he would say if I told him how much money a quarter back
for the NFL makes in a year. I bet in his world the hole state of Kansas does not turn that much
money in a year. Jesse James and the boys was said to have robbed a train to get less than a
thousand dollars. Come to think of it I have got to tell him to have dinner with the president at a
fund raiser they sometimes pay forty thousand dollars each. Maybe this would be too far over his
head if I go into this stuff and what a mistake for every one if the Civil war had not given freedom
to those slaves. I have got to tell him that in sports if one was to leave out the blacks we would
have a lousy team. Could tell him about the wages they earn in show business and what great
looks and talent some of them have. Man to have missed Sammy Davis Jr. Would have been a
drag and how about Nat King Cole? Names just keep coming to me who would mean nothing to
him because they are not born yet but what talent and great people. Makes me smile to think what
he would say if he could walk through Deon Sanders home? Would have to put a roller skate
under his lip to get him over the door step.
Walking down the ramp after departing from the final plane I have to stretch and walk
several feet before my legs begin to relax. Did not even imagine that Hays was this big of an
airport or there were this many people in the area. I had been looking at maps dated 1880 and I
guess I must have thought this area is the only one in the country that did not grow in the last
hundred years. Would have really been humors if I would have ordered a horse and buggy to take
me around. Bet the highway patrol would enjoy that one not to mention the Sheriff’s department,
city police, FBI, Homeland security, CIA and however many more officers that we just absolutely
can’t get by without. Now I have to think about those that would be here if I were to run the horse,
they would have veterinarians, animal rights, EPA (poop on the street) road maintenance from
city, county and government. Hell; without even trying I could save seventy five dollars on a car
and cost the Kansas people a million dollars. Got to get my mind back on the real issue here and
forget about the fun stuff…
Wish I could afford a helicopter to run the area looking. Would give a nickel to be able to
take Sal on a ride in one. Drop in on him in a helicopter and it would be all over, he would drop
dead right there and I would miss that life all together.
Picking up my bags I go to the desk and find where my car is parked and in no time at all
I am driving out looking for an empty lot. Wow should have gone on Goggle Earth and looked at
the houses here. No way am I going to find a rock along the river, this is not even close to what I
was expecting. Not even to the motel and can see this trip is wasted at least with how we figured
on finding something after all these years. Looks like the only thing to do is to drive around and
see if I can see a solution to my problem.
Back at the motel I have decided to just lay back take it easy and try to figure my way
through this maze. Here it is the year of 2012 and I am retrogressing back to 1880 and can’t think
of way to prove what I’m doing. I do remember reading or hearing years ago about Bridey Murphy
or something like that and the woman proved she had lived in a previous life but this is different.
I should find that book or story and see how she did that it may help in this situation. I Have not
even thought of it for years and years but it is funny I can remember the name. Seems like that
happened in the 50’s and many tried to say it was all lies but the facts were pretty strong as I
remember them. Bridey was a the name of a woman in Ireland I think but this woman went into a
trance and could tell who she was friends with and were she had lived at the time. She knew
everything there was to know about this other life and they still didn’t believe her.
In order for me to prove I have been talking with Sal would be easy once I figure out how
to find something. I could let someone tell me what to hide then I would go back and tell Sal to
hide that item and we would then find it. If I were to do that several times after someone telling
me what to have in the hidey hole how could they call that a lie? My trouble is that I am not sure
that Sal is actually here in Hays. Think I will go down to the local pub and see if there is somebody
that may give me some kind of an idea how to go about this.

 

Chapter Eight
After all the thinking that has gone into this problem I believe the answer is to get the help
of Salmon and maybe together we can solve the problem. In order to contact him I have found
that I do a lot better in loose fitting clothes that are a natural material like cotton but not rayon or
such, so I change into a cotton tee shirt get rid of my shoes, change into a pair of cotton jogging
pants. Still early afternoon so I first must get the room dark so I pull the blinds and the room has
a small lamp which I turn on and turn all other lights out. The room is dark with just the lamp
giving any light. Now I turn the chair alongside the bed a little toward the lamp across the room
so that I am looking directly toward it. Settling down into the chair and taking three great big deep
breaths I look directly in to the light from the lamp. Telling myself that I will not go to sleep and
that if anything should disturb me it I will be able to deal with it and come right back to where I
am. I am going through my ritual now; here I am looking at Salmon; however he is with two
friends and they are talking about the cattle they are looking for. I watch them and just stay far
enough away that Pacer does not get any idea I am about. I know from past trips that the horse
knows when I am there and makes no bones about letting Salmon know and in this case it could
be bad for him to try to explain to the friends. Amazing how I can hold away and hear them yet
without really trying can stay far enough they don’t know I am here.
Salmon is telling Roy to go circle the herd and get in front of them but to stay far enough
out front that he does not hold them back any. Dib now you should either stay here while I go over
there or you go over and I will wait here. No problem Sal you have worked your mouth so hard
this morning that you must be tired I will go over there and give you a chance to rest. Dib the
fact that your mother made love to a coyote and is no excuse to be so rangy about things, you
should just be glad when I found you with the rest of those cubs I didn’t drown you as others would
have, now get out of here before I change my mind.
Come on Pacer let’s move those little doggies before they grow roots. Herding cows is
kind of like growing a garden just before you can make money a storm or some damn thing comes
along to stop you. Guy over in Kansas City I hear is talking about charging a tax on cows didn’t
make much sense but if the crooks don’t get you the lawyers or politicians will. Anybody with a
lick of sense knows that the only difference between the two is the mask. Woa! Pacer what is
going on? Damn you Verl what are you doing here now? Just figured out what Pacer was trying
to tell me. Can’t wait till I am resting to talk is that it? Can’t you see I am in front of the class
room teaching these four legged foul smelling critters to follow instructions? I sang songs to an
audience of over 400 last night biggest crowd I ever sang to. Wasn’t a one of those cows got up
and left while I was singing. So anyway what is on your mind today old mighty chief of the no
wipey tribe?
I have been trying to find where you are in regard to today’s cities and towns. Sal you
would never be able to imagine how many people and buildings are located where you are today.
Further than the eye can see are rows and rows of building with streets, and sidewalks. You have
to be in the wrong area there is nothing here to bring that many people here. Sal I am telling you
that even the river has been changed a large lake has been built and airports, which for your
information is where the airplanes I mentioned to you land. What does an airplane look like Verl?
Kind of tuff to explain when you have nothing to compare it to but I will try. Say I just got a great
idea I can’t draw anything or touch anything there but I can get you to; get down off your horse a
minute. OK get a stick and we will start but we will start with a car and then move to an airplane.
Draw two wheels one in front of the other like a wagon. It matters not but just to give you an idea
they are about 17 inches high. Now draw a line from the middle of each tire each direction a little
ways like the wagon is about 20 feet long. That’s it now in the front from that line go up a little
bit, OK now turn the line back toward the back. Stop you have the corner to square round the
corner a little bit, ya that’s it now back where you started kind of curve the lineup, O.K. now turn
it toward the back. Keep the same distance from the ground as the front, that’s it. Stop now turn
the line down on an angle, no curve it more toward the back. Stop now turn the line straight back,
don’t draw so fast now turn the curve toward the ground that’s it. Now let me explain the thing
that runs it is an engine and it is in the front behind that first wheel. Just put an X there yes that’s
it. Now that curved part is the front windshield and it is glass that you can see through. Now draw
a bench in the middle of the thing, no back just a little bit more. Very good job for the first time
and we are just beginning. Now draw a line half way up from the bench to the roof going length
ways ya that’s it, now turn it the direction of the rest of the car just short of the top and around and
down to the line, ya! That is a side widow and there is a door right there to get in and out just like
a stage coach with a window in it. The window is also glass and it goes up and down to keep the
wind out when going fast. How do you guide this thing? Round wheel right behind the front
windshield, kind of like right in your lap. It is called a steering wheel and it turns the front wheel
and lets you turn just like a wagon. You set on that bench only it is very soft and has springs in it
and a pedal on the floor that when you push harder it goes faster. Another pedal on the floor that
is a break and they work a lot better than a wagon break because they stop all four wheels not just
two like a wagon. How tall is this thing? Most cars you could stand and reach straight out and
you would be about the same as the car. Trucks are a lot bigger and they have some that the tires
are twenty feet high and carry a lot of weight. What would you do with something like that? Never
mind that right now first we get you to see what a car looks like now imagine this thing will go
100 miles per hour and it can get up to that speed in about 25 seconds. Not all of them are this fast
but most will do over sixty and some can do a lot more that 100 mile per hour. This we just drew
is a small car with one seat but they have many with two seats and a door in front and one in back
on each side and that my friend is called a four door. In about 40 years you will begin to hear
about these and by the year 1915 they will be making them in production. What is production?
Easy to explain that one let’s take a barn with a door in the front and one in the back and we bring
a two wood beam into the barn and set them on a box and just inside the door are two guys standing
with a pile of lumber and as you set the first beams on a box and they put a beam in front and one
in the back to make the wagon, now they roll the boxes out of the way to make room for two more
which comes in as the box move forward. Now four guys have two wheels mounted on an axle
and two put the axle under the front and the rear and take the boxes out and push them outside the
barn to be used again at the beginning. The wagon is pushed into the barn further for more things
by somebody else so the wagon enters the barn and in an hour it comes out the other end complete
with seats, top or canvas and anything else you would want. Everyone in the barn does the same
thing over and over and they get very good at doing their jobs so the production goes up. This
idea came about in about 1900 by Henry Ford and is still used to day to build most everything we
use. Now an airplane just has wings added to the sides and a windmill out the front that turns and
pushes the air past the wings and causes it to fly. Don’t bother with questions because it is not
necessary to teach you how they work only what they do and what they look like. Now you go
back to work and I will return another time to continue your education. Just a minute there Verl I
have several questions and it matters not when I go back to the cattle they are only to be held right
here for a day so doesn’t get your feathers ruffled.
What do you have in mind Sal? I have kind of been talking around the subject like a
squirrel working on a nut and have a question. You said that you are living in 2012 and we were
wondering. Well we was… Tell me if you think the United States will continue forever or the world
as far as that goes. Sal we have no more idea than you do as to what the future will hold but let
me tell you this the United States is so driven by greed that most of the people are living off the
government. The president today gives away all the money he can get his hands on to get people
to vote for him. He could care less if the country folded up or not. The congress only cares how
much they can have for wages, retirement and health programs. A congress man serves one term
and retires for life. The president gets more money than God for the rest of his life but the damn
fool don’t stop to think he will get nothing when the country goes broke. Forty five percent of the
people are Democrats and forty five are Republicans and they fight over who can screw the people
the most. The president we have is not worth a nickel and congress is worth two cents. Together
they would be run out of office in your day and hung before sun down. The people get paid for
doing nothing and we are so far in debt that if the people could find a job their great grand kids
could not get us out of debt. Nobody will vote them out of office because they are getting money
for nothing and if the crook in office loses his job they are think they will get nothing. The news
is more lies than truth and if you said the truth nobody would watch or read what you have to say.
The news people are only driven by money and money only never ever do you hear of someone
being saved by a gun but if someone is shot that makes national news and is from coast to coast.
How long will we last as a nation? The end is so close that only the fools that are being feed by
this government believes it will continue. Half of the people work for the Government and 25%
are out of work that gives 75% voting for more hand outs and 25% are so busy working to feed
the rest they can’t stop and complain for fear of losing what they have if things don’t change odds
are very good that the answer to your question is in 2025 there will be no United States and I don’t
think it matters who is President.
Think that one over and I will see you Sal. Good bye mighty thinker in the sky who I shall
forever be beholding.

 

Chapter Nine
As my eyes started to focus I could see two or three faces at the same time coming to light.
I had on an oxygen mask and the doctor was leaning over me checking my eyes. What is going
on? Where am I and how did I get here? The doctor holding up his hand indicating for me to stop
talking was smiling at me. You have been out for several hours and we could not bring you around
so the ambulance brought you here to the hospital and we have been running several tests to see
what the problem was. You didn’t respond to our normal testing but all vital signs were good.
What did you do to get into this fix? I do self-hypnosis and I had gone into a relaxed state of mind
and must not have been able to come out of it. What were you experiencing? I had stepped back
into a previous life and was communicating with someone. I would like to keep you here tonight
and run a few other tests. Not on your life will that happen. I have spent one day in a hospital
sense the doctor hit me on the ass and started me into this world and I am not about to let that
happen again. But we may find something terribly wrong. No doubt if I stayed you would but it
would be my head for staying not my body. People die in hospitals and it is a known thing that
doctors kill more people than guns. I will take my chances at home. I would like you to consult
a physiologist if you would. There is no doubt in my mind that you have several friends in the
field but they will just have to get by without my help I haven’t got time for what I am doing and
helping those idiots too.
I would like to ask you a few questions Verl if I may. Let me think about this for just a
second you are probably getting five hundred dollars a minute and want to learn from me is that
right? Well Doctor I should get your five hundred and five hundred more for teaching you. That’s
not real you are my patient not the other way around. Well then don’t ask me what happened tell
me what happened. Every time someone goes to the doctor they have to tell the doctor what is
wrong for that kind of money you should be telling them. Let me out of here and you can play
doctor with these other gals that are wearing the white meat cutting overalls.
Can’t figure why he got so mad Annabelle but he at least was nice enough to get out of the
way. Verl you are impossible to deal with when you get into these moods. Doctors try to make
you feel inferior and I refuse to be talked down to because the damn fool stayed in school most of
his life studying. They don’t talk down to you they try to get you to understand what they are
saying and in your case that is a full load for anyone.
Did you talk with Salmon Verl? Yes, I did but we have a real problem in that I am not
really sure he is where he says he is. I can’t believe someone could live somewhere and not know
where that is or what date it is. Time must have been a lot different than that it is today because
he doesn’t seem to know much of what is going on and could care less. Well one thing is for sure
the doctor doesn’t want you to go back and do any of that stuff again. Where did you get that idea
Annabelle? He gave me instructions not to leave you alone and diffidently not let you go into
another of those trances. He says that you are starting to imagine that the past is real and that what
is happening is reality to you. What kind of an idiot is he that he has never heard of life after life
or anything else after life? How can he be a doctor and be so narrow minded? Never mind Verl
we will talk about it later. Can’t you see Annabelle that is the very reason I am trying to prove
that I am talking with Sal. If I can find a way for him to leave me something and I find it. The
next step would be to have a team of people join me in a room and let them determine what I could
find to prove he left it. Don’t you see if someone in the room says tell him to leave four rocks and
a marble then when I dug it up and it they found four rocks and a marble. It would be hard to say
I didn’t tell him what to leave but also let me do that four or five times in a row and they will have
to except it as the truth.
Just for now let me drive us home and I want you to just take it easy and rest for the rest of
the week, just take it easy and I will try to do the trivial things around for now Verl. You are going
to drive me home and I am supposed to relax? I will be sure and thank the doctor for not just
letting out the lion but putting my head into its mouth. How long has this going to go on until we
can get back to normal? Verl, I am going to stay right at your side until I am know you will be
OK and that everything is all right. Sounds like a great idea to me let’s start in with a few beer
then work past the hot tub to the bed room. Somewhere in between I think I should be getting
better. You think everything can be fixed with sex. No I don’t Annabelle some things take a beer
others take a piece of pie but we should cover all possibilities.
Laying there counting her breathing and making sure she was asleep I decided to make a
short visit just to make sure I was OK. Taking in three good breaths of air I started counting down
from ten telling myself that at the bottom I would be in a deep sleep. I counted to zero and nothing
happened. Normally I would have had a picture of things as they were in Sal’s time but this time
nothing happened. I told myself not to worry that tomorrow it would be better and it would work
out of me.
Annabelle having gone to the store and I had done nothing all day long I am ready to get
back to Sal. Getting into my favorite chair after closing off all outside light I turn on the table
lamp which allows me to tilt my head back and still keep an eye on the light. Watching the light
beam as it seems to float toward me I begin to relax and taking three great big breaths I begin
counting and telling myself I will not go to sleep that at the bottom of the stairs I will approach Sal
and have a conversation. I count down and feel myself relax and everything is as it should be
however no Sal. I count down another ten steps and open the door and no Sal. I just stand there
and look around the room and nothing is there as it should be. I run back up the stairs and find
myself in my own front room looking at the lamp and have accomplished nothing. What is wrong
why can’t I see Sal? What could be going on? I am not overly tied, have been resting and my diet
seems to be the same. Maybe I have got to go find someone to help me with this. I had better
study on this for a day or so.

 

Chapter Ten
As Verl’s wife Annabelle comes in she says “Verl are you here?” Yes Anna I am here on
the couch. Are you sick? No I am not sick but things are not like they should be. I have tried and
tried and I can’t make contact with Sal and we were just getting to the point he understood the
situation and we were making progress to his leaving something for me to find. It was so easy to
talk with him and in truth he was so full of shit that I was relay enjoying myself.
Have you considered that maybe the doctor was right when he said you should not be doing
these things? Anna the doctor has no more idea what is happening than a rabbit could tell the
weather. About the only thing I can think of that would help would be to find someone who is
good at hypnosis and have him help me over this. When I lived in Vegas I went to that collage
and got some help but I don’t know really how I will go about this. Maybe if I go on line and look
I might find someone who is willing to visit with me and has some experience in what I am doing.
I will have dinner ready in twenty minutes so you can go wash up and get ready then after dinner
take a few minutes and see what is available on line.
Anna this is a very good meal and I want to thank you for going to that extra work of doing
it. Verl you always were appreciative of what I do so thank you. What are you thinking about
now? I don’t know if I explained to you about all of this I know I told about how I do it but not
why. When I was very young I had these deep feeling that there was something I was to do but
couldn’t figure out what it was and the feeling just never went away it just kind of laid in the back
of my mind but it was always there. As I got older and had learned to relax and go back into
previous lives it was still there even then. Well I did a job in Santa Cruz California and one time
on the week end I had been around the equipment and men to the point I had to get away. Well I
went down town and went into this bar and the bar tender and one woman was the only ones there
which were fine by me. I took a seat and was drinking a beer just listening to these two women
talk and I don’t know how it happened but I finally ask this woman if I could come over closer to
her at the bar and talk and she said that would be all right. After getting there she turned to me
and said you should go back and release him. What are you talking about I said. She said you tied
a horse to the hitching post in front of a cabin and went in and died. You could not have given me
a bigger surprise in this world. How did you know this? I said. She continued on and said you
also had something you were supposed to tell and you didn’t and now you have to go back and
make it right. I told her that what she said was true but how could she possibly know this? She
said she worked with the local paper and was a psychic and she told me her name and to this day
I know she was very good at that and told the truth without my ever suggesting this and there was
no way she could have known. This has stayed with me for years and I have thought of it often.
That was the reason I had that in the back of my mind I was to do something. I have grown up
with the idea that we can go from one life to another and because I felt this so strong that my
memory was not completely wiped out as it normally was. It took years and years for this thinking
to form and I had to meet several people which influenced me. Suppose I had not walked into
that place and meet her? I doubt that I would have ever thought of this on my own.
Years ago I lived in Carson City and was friends with a guy by the name of Dean Wright
who worked at Harvey’s Wagon Wheel when I did and he was in the slot department. I moved to
Utah and years later moved to Los Vegas and was walking through the Frontier Casino and going
the other way was Dean. I stopped and turned around and he did the same thing we renewed a
friendship and at that time he introduced me to self-hypnosis and later I meet the woman in Santa
Cruz and it began to come together for me.
As Anna did the dishes I began to surf on the net to see what I could learn. Many offered
to teach me how to do self-hypnosis but I didn’t find what I felt was right for me. I would have to
continue my search and maybe change it a little to come up with what I needed.
After several days of soul searching and putting the problem in as many different ways as
possible it came back to the same thing, nothing. It is now two weeks sense I was able to make
contact with Sal and now what the real problem was has dropped in priority to second place. I
must find a way to get back to talking with him. At this point I have discussed the idea with two
others that do hypnosis and they both agree it is not possible to speak to another in the past. Just
as well talk to Sal and tell him about an air plane and he would say it is not possible. That is the
first thing that came to mind while talking with these people. If you have not saw it it can’t be
done.
Several years ago while in a deep thought state it came to me that I could hear them there
for they could hear me. Once I accepted the idea it was then just a matter of focusing on putting
it to use. The first time I spoke was to another of my previous friends I just said, “ can you hear
me?” The response was such that I knew he could hear me, but his reaction was not what I wanted
to see. As I thought about it what would I do if someone from my past spoke to me some night
when all was quiet and calm? Be like the drunk who fell in the open grave and when the next guy
fell in, the drunk guy says, “ you’ll never get out without a ladder”, but he did. I found out right
then and there don’t get into that kind of situation if you are not prepared to bring them death or
close to it.
Anna brought up a very good point which I had been thinking of a lot. What would happen
if I were just to go to some body and have them hypnotize me and just see if there was something
in my past or present that was blocking my thought process. May be a good idea and not only that
I really felt I needed to meet someone in this area of expertise to become a friend and someone I
could bounce ideas off of. Most people have someone they turn to as a friend or family to guide
them when necessary. My dad had no trouble letting me know when some of my goofy ideas were
out of line. At one time I really believed I could talk with him from the other side so to speak but
I didn’t want to go there for several reasons and the biggest reason was I didn’t want to hear the
part about I told you so. I am not going to think down those lines now I need to be thinking of
how to get back into my regular standard of perfection mentally.

 

Chapter Eleven
After spending the week end thinking it over and taking with Anna about the problem of
being able to contact Sal I had considered that maybe my problem was a spiritual more than mental.
Maybe I was running in an area that I was not supposed to be in. A hundred years ago I would
have been beheaded for this kind of thing. Of course that is why nobody understood the subject,
they were not permitted to even talk on this subject. Funny how that is, you are to accept what
they believe and not question it. Stay in the box and don’t get out if you want to stay safe. Seems
like every religion I ever heard of was the same way in most cases, we teach everything you need
to know and we know what is best for you because we have learned it over time. In reality they
have not learned anything because they have not varied from the beginning because someone else
told them the same thing and they didn’t question it. Maybe I have done just that and stepped over
the line and God is trying to teach me or keep me from entering that subject. I must admit to
myself I have never heard of anyone knowing or at least talking on the subject as deeply as I feel
I have been. I know I am not the first to look at themselves in other life times because I have read
of it but the very thing I am trying to accomplish to my knowledge has never been done before.
Has that got anything to do with what is happening or is my problem just a personal thing of one
kind or another? Once I have proven that I can make contact, problems like this go away but in
the meantime those that know what I have been doing and have been reading (have been sending
notes to others) will start to wonder if I am working with Satan and not God. It is extremely
important that this be taken care of and fully understood as to why this happened. Now that is
easier said than any other problem I can think of or have ever saw to be overcome. Man I can step
through the grave so to speak but how do I prove God is guiding me? I think I just found a way
to describe my situation I can refer to it as stepping through the grave, ya, going right on through
and out the other side.
No choice in this at all when I go to sleep at night I will just have to ask him how I can get
out of this box. If it is to be done in his name he should have a real good way of stepping around
it.
Good morning Anna. Good morning Verl, I want to know if you learned anything in the
night. I got an incredible response that really surprised me. Kind of like asking how did that water
taste to you? And have me say, “old”. Answer didn’t seem to fit the question but sometimes what
we are looking for is not really the right question. Let’s talk about it during breakfast today I feel
like I was working all night and need nourishment. Ya! You have only gained sixty pounds you
don’t need; which makes me wonder why you don’t use the self-hypnosis to lose weight if you are
so handy with it. Well to begin with the old story some eat to live others live to eat and I am
among the latter. When I get to Saint Peter I don’t want to have be denied any of the good foods
available to me right here. Beside you know they say the day should start with a good meal. Yes
Verl I know that and you take it to the extreme with a good lunch and great snacks and a terrific
dinner. Well if you are going to do something do a good job of it.
Now that breakfast is over with what are you going to do to find the answer to your dilemma
Verl? When I was coming around this morning and just barely awake I thought of something or
it was a planted thought one that I should do like the Indians did in the past and take two or three
days of fasting and get away from the city life and look to within myself for the answer. Where
will you go? I was thinking of leaving the dog with you and taking a lot of water and a sleeping
bag and heading up into the pines for a few days. Sounds to me like a real drag and if you can go
two or three days without food that will be enlightenment to me.
Thank you for the help getting the things ready to go and I will give you a call and let you
know where I ended up. Be careful honey… So what if I talk to myself I learned it years ago from
Sal so I will not feel completely alone here I can understand why. Driving out of the Bay Area
and going up into the gold country is kind of fun and I have not done this for a long time so it
should be different. Sure wish I could have brought the dog along he would have really enjoyed
the trip but I would not have been able to stay on track mentally as to why I was there in the first
place. Wonder if when the Indians went off into the woods to meet with their sprit leaders if they
stopped and got a couple of six packs to hold them over? What drag it must have been to be an
Indian in some ways. They had to stay out till they had a vision and it guided them for years after
that. Might be a good idea if I could get up into the redwoods and into the back country out of the
way? Think I will just drift along and go with the flow of traffic and when I get out of the city
turn to an off road and away from the worlds confusion and turmoil. Better stop in here and get
some gas don’t know where I will end up and they may not have it available when I need it. Back
on the road again and it seems like I have been driving for hours but anywhere along here should
be a turn out that I can get out of the way. I wonder if those out in the country out of California
know how lucky they are not to have to put up with the idiots and lunatics that seem to dwell here?
Some of these guys have brought kids with them and left their brains home. This should be a nice
spot for what I want and I can lock the car and climb up onto the highest point I can see. Sure glad
I don’t have to steal an Eagle feather to prove my man hood to anyone, would be a real
disappointment for them. Getting kind of tired of climbing and could use a couple of hamburgers
with fry’s and a chocolate shake to wash it down with. Bet those Indians didn’t have a McDonald’s
either. Most people think the Indians lost because they had to have some of white man’s stuff like
guns, whiskey, hatchets and other useless things but I am sure it was a lack of Bic lighters and fast
foods.
Starting to get dark and here I set with no T.V. or radio man I must have been dreaming
when I planned this thing. I could have stopped and got some chicken to go and loaded up of
course I just as well start enforcing my mental attitude and get with the program. Having this fire
and looking out over the country reminds me of the night I first meet Sal and his response to me.
Wonder what I would do if someone were to come gliding in on me here and start talking about
the how my life was about to make a big change? Remembering my first words to Sal, “What you
are about to hear will change your life forever”. I knew he didn’t have much time to live so how
did I come up with that? The Indians were said to visit their sprit so it really is what I am attempting
to do right now.
Climbing up this mountain was a lot more work than I ever figured it would be. For some
reason the pack on my back was a lot heavier than I would have thought it should be. Why I picked
this spot I have no idea this mountain is not the highest in the area but because of all the trees it is
secluded enough that it gives one the feeling that you are truly the only man alive and out here
completely by yourself. I can see all directions around and luck in one respect I have this single
tree up here that I can lean against and it gives me a enter piece somehow. Now that I am up here
all alone I sure miss Nick for a dog he seems to feel my feelings and is very assuring in giving me
the feeling of a real friend and buddy being with me. May be life does have certain things that
repeat over and over. Sal has a horse he confines in and has his total affection but he does not
have a wife either but Nick adds to my world big time and that may be because of Pacer being
with Sal all the time.
Is neither here nor there in order to make my connections again I truly believe that I need
to turn toward myself and see what the problem is. Being up here on the mountain alone and
nothing to distract me allows a deep enter thought process. I haven’t the faintest idea how the
Indians did this except I know they did not eat food but am not sure if they took water with them
or not. I can definitely see that by fasting you are following part of the bible which now I think
about it I kind of wish I would have brought. Oh well better take a drink of water and unpack my
sleeping bag which I am sure those before me never brought. Opening the back pack and unfolding
the sleeping bag a bible falls out. I will be damned Anna had to have put that in there and a marker
in it. Look here a note from her, “ As you search for those things with in you remember that there
are those of us who have complete and total faith in you and what you are trying to accomplish,
Love Anna”. Wow does she ever know how to make a guy feel good. Special woman and a great
friend she has turned out to be.
Almost dark and look at all those stars, there is something about this that makes one feel
small and as I look up can feel my self being led to a deeper understanding of the world around
me. I am but a small and minute particle in a great big and wonderful world. Maybe I should have
brought a pencil and paper to write down what is going on in my mind as the day wears on. Here
it is too dark to read and those parts of the bible that I read today are floating around inside my
head and no doubt will remain there as I sleep tonight. As I lay here I am reminded of the visits I
have made to Sal or the things he has said to me. It is amazing how much I can relate to all of it
but then that is understanding for I am looking back at what has gone in the past. Before deciding
on talking with Sal I had gone back into a life before that one and saw myself standing on a ship
which I knew was from her majesty the queen and that I was on a voyage for her personally as she
had ask me to do. I could see myself standing out on the deck of the ship and could read every
thought that was going through my mind. I was thinking of Elizabeth my wife who was left behind
in England and the love we had for each other. I could hardly wait to return and be with her it was
almost my every thought and completed every part of me. That love which I felt and knew she
felt for me made me wish I could return to that life and continue again as it was then. I can also
remember another life of being at my mother’s feet with the fire burning very strong in the fireplace
and my mother is doing something with her hands netting or something and I am on the floor just
learning to walk. I know as I am looking that this will be a very short life and I will not live very
long before I will be leaving this world. I will not last long enough to learn to talk but I can see
here sitting there just as plane as can be. I have looked at many different lives had have determined
that Sal had to have been the life just prior to this one. He is completely alone in that he has no
one who watches out for him and he has complete control as to his every action.
Look at that sunrise will you, man that is like I have never saw one in my life that is beyond
the very imagination of beauty. Just a few clouds to reflect the rays of the sun and allow the eye
to be drawn to the sun coming up. This all by itself is worth more than money could buy. As I
look to the East I am reminded of the very reason I am here and how small I am in this great big
world. Looking to prove God is guiding me becomes very true as you look at this sunrise and
understand that this is like the very beginning the very start of the day is all most like this is the
start of life.
First thing this morning I could not get my mind to leave the picture of a great big stack of
hot cakes covered with butter and dripping with syrup. I finally got the idea to leave my mind but
was replaced with the biggest double dickered cheese burger this side of Texas with a side of both
onion rings and French fries. Drinking lots of water did much to wash away the hunger that was
eating at my big belly and I have a bridge to sale you when I get down from here. I spend more
time reading the bible watching the sky for birds of prey who are hunting for lunch and I can’t
help wishing they would deliver here. At this point I could eat a live rattle snake and never worry
about it. Back to the bible and taking in hundreds of thousands of calories with every taste of
water, cool water, old Dan can you see that cool clear water just drifting there with ease loaded
with groceries, many many groceries meant for you and me. Forget that stuff and get back on
target this is only the second day out and you would think you had not had a bite to eat in weeks
and weeks. Ya and can’t you see those pies in the trees, the turkey in the breeze just waiting for
me and you. Got to change something around a little bit here or I will accomplish nothing accept
hunger.
Night coming on not a cloud in the sky and the sun is just now going behind the tree line
and will shortly be out of sight. The temperature is doping fast without the sun shine that was
warming and comforting as I have been sleeping and reading all day long. A little fire would be a
very welcome sight so I am lucky there is wood everywhere you look and a trusty Bic lighter in
my pocket. I don’t want a very big fire and during the day I had dug a fairly deep pit which will
contain the fire and you will not be able to see very far from here which is good because some
idiot would be sending the fire department up here to put out my fire. Haven’t got more than fifteen
feet one way and ten the other without rolling off of my little spot of the world. Not much to do
but read, pray and think of food all day long and sometimes the three are all tied together. I had
trouble sleeping last night because of the hunger pains and it doesn’t seem like it is going to be
any different tonight. If one is to fast it is a good thing there is nothing to eat because I could eat
a steer and leave the horns for tomorrow.
As I come around and wake up it is the first clue that I sleep at all last night. Can just
barely remember the sun set and the beauty of it before sleep hit me. Seems strange that I have
sleep so much and yet went to sleep so early must be this fresh air and hunger pains playing with
my mental powers. Let’s think here now for a few minutes is this my second day? No I think this
is my third day. I can remember two sun sets so it has to be three days yea I will buy that three
days that has to be a record for me for doing nothing all though when I was sick I did go several
days without much food but then I couldn’t keep it down and that is different.
Looks like this is going to be another beautiful day and maybe today will be the day I find
my sprit speaking to my soul and I can get on with life and forget about this nonsense that I am
going though. Seems like the longer I am up here the less important it is, kind of like why am I
up here and not down at the table with a ten course meal waiting for me. Woa that makes me think
there must be a phone here somewhere I told Anna I would call and let her know I was all right.
Digging through the back pack I find the thing has been right down in a bottom of a pocket which
is hid behind the top flap of the pack. Anna must have put it there so it wouldn’t get broken. Good
Morning petty lady. Yes I am doing fine and I am sorry I didn’t call but had forgotten you was
going to pack my phone so this morning I dug around and found it. No I have not had anything to
eat and I have not only thought of food I have also been thinking what an idiot I must be; but here
I set and here I will remain till my inter soul takes up the fight and brings me to my senses. No
nothing has come to me yet but I do seem to sense an enter peace and harmony with the things
around me. I am up on a mountain overlooking valleys all around and the birds of prey are circling
all the time which seems to keep my thoughts awake and the stars at night are amazing. I wish
you could see the sun sets up here every evening they are beyond imagination and very inspiring
to the whole thing. What does the weather man say about the weather? Oh that’s good I am glad
to hear that I would not like to be caught up here in a bad rain storm and getting down could be
rather embarrassing. If he sees it as clear and warm for another week I should have plenty of time
to either starve to death or make contact with whatever is necessary to bring sanity into my world
again. Thanks for the information and hopefully I will be home in a day or two and ready for two
cows, ten chickens, eight dozen of eggs, and something to go with it to tide me over till dinner
time. Love you and I will be in touch.
No rain predicted in the near future which is good news for me. Should be a bright and
sunny day again today and being up here this high it never gets too hot during the day anyway.
Maybe I will spend a little time this morning going over the bible and seeing if there is anything
in it that would not permit me to look back into my past or into the future as far as that goes. God
never said we were not to try and learn all we can, our fellow men try to hold us to within what
they perceive as proper but the bible doesn’t say anything about this I can find. It might be that I
am gaining a little into all this because it is coming into my mind and overriding the hunger and
thoughts of food more all the time.
Well Lord any time you want to clue me in on what’s going on I am all ears. Just take a
few minutes and any way you feel right about how the situation should be handled is Jim Dandy
with me. Oh no! I hear the thunder and can see the lighting going on and Anna said the weather
forecast was for clear skis and warm weather but those idiots down at the weather station must be
sippen glue or something. This is getting louder every second and it must be covering half of the
state how could that not show on the radar? It’s getting so dark it is like night except for the
lighting flashes. I am about to get soaked good and nothing but a jacket and maybe hide under the
sleeping bag. Going to sleep cold and Hungary tonight. Dear God what is that bright light I swear
I have never saw a light so bright in all… oh! My I know what that is I must have died because I
am looking at Gods light!. Verl you are not dead, you have ask for help and I am about to offer it to
you. Many ask and few hear but nobody is left without a sign to guide them. I have left written word and
have had men speak all over the world with my word only those that have chosen to ignore hear not. I have
offered you thoughts and you have heard them, how you choose to follow is left to you. Believe in me and
follow my words and life after death shall be completely revealed to you as you have been instructing.
As I listen the light begins to fade and I notice the thunder is no longer in the ski, it is just
before sundown and there are clouds in the West, the sun shine on those clouds are in multicolor.
I am beholding beyond imagination I am awed that I have saw and heard. Will anyone believe
me? What can I tell others? It comes to me that it matters not, what I have saw was no doubt for
my eyes and ears alone what others believe should not change my destination or my belief. I know
in my heart that what I am doing is right and if others choose to doubt or turn their head it shall
not be of my holding back.
As I study on what I have saw and heard I feel that I must stay another night and absolve
things from my past and know get a better understanding as to what just happened. I believe I will
call Anna and let her know that I will be down tomorrow. Hello Hon., just wanted to let you know
that I have had a visit and even with the great big storm with all the lightning and thunder he came
through. What do you mean there has been no lightning or thunder you must have missed the new
weather report because it sure happened. Well you check again and I will be down tomorrow and
we will talk about it. In the meantime call the station and ask them if anyone reported what I just
said. Love you, talk with you tomorrow. I am the only one who saw a storm and heard the thunder.
That is beyond imagination. Wow.

 

Chapter Twelve
Well Verl it’s good to see you made it out of bed. I came in a little bit ago to check and
see if you were breathing. Seems as though you get a full belly and a soft bed and life can go on
without you for a long time. Well Anna things were not as easy as I thought they might be, first
climbing up that mountain with a pack on my back is not exactly a pick nick you know. Then not
having anything to eat didn’t add any to the situation and I couldn’t find an easy chair that would
fit me either. So there I set with a bible which I want to thank you for sending it did take some of
the boredom away and it was also very enlightening to my situation. Now if you have gotten a
little rest and feel better I would really like to know just what happened up there that you seemed
so excited about. Well Anna for the first few days my inter voice keep trying to discourage me
and it was hard to stay focused on the whole thing. After a while the hunger left and I started to
visualize the big picture as I was supposed to.
On the third day or maybe the fourth I think I lost track somewhere along the way anyway
I feel asleep and would be dreaming and then I would be awake and there became a time when I
was not sure if I was awake or asleep. You told me there was no thunder or lightning in the sky
but to my eyes it was all around me and the thunder was so real that I thought the rain was going
to come down any second. Turned out my sleeping bag and everything else was dry so there was
no rain. I figured I was awake but if I were to be put on the stand and had to swear on the bible I
was awake and had full senses I would have to say I was not sure. So anyway in my mind while
all this was going on everything turned to the brightest almost yellow light and it came at me like
a flood light shining directly on me and made me feel like the lord himself was standing over me.
It was a very humbling feeling and made my every being alert and on edge. I could not have been
more impressed than I was at that moment and it was like no noise what so ever, there was a
calmness and quite time that it made you want to hold your breath and just stare at the bright light.
I was already setting down and if I were not I would have lowered myself to my knees and gave
every thought to whatever was consuming me. It was not scary or anything like that it was like
God himself had stood over you and you could feel his presents. Humbling is an understatement
if ever there was. Any way as all this was visual I don’t know if I heard it with my ears or if it just
came to me though thought waves but somehow it was if God himself were speaking to me.
Sometimes you wake up in the morning and you know something that you did not know when you
went to bed. How did you learn it? Somehow it is just part of your thinking and you know it is
real. Well he spoke to me directly or at least that is what I think but somehow I don’t believe
others would believe me. Funny Anna how it is someone dies and they are brought back to life
and they say they had this very bright light shining on them which I call Gods light but regardless
nobody doubts that at all but somehow I feel if I were to go out on the porch and yell to all the
neighbors and tell them what happened I don’t believe they would believe me. I don’t doubt you
at all Verl I am sure that what you said is true and now I wonder if you will be able to continue
with Sal and making contact. Anna I have not tried but there is no doubt in my mind what so ever
that I can. I have spent a lot of time thinking over why I could not do it and I think the reason is I
felt guilty like maybe I was doing something I was not supposed to do and it was from the devil
or something like that. After this experience I can rest assured and know that it is with God
blessings. We are led to believe things that others tell us and we react to them and in reality there
is no basis for that at all. I don’t understand what you mean Verl. Well Anna as I grew up someone
tells me that Ouija boards are evil and someone else feeds in that not praying before going to bed
or before dinner or this or that and as we get older there are so many things that have been told to
us that pretty soon we don’t know what is real and what is bull. I do have a great respect for my
deity and without a doubt believe but have you ever considered what it would be like dealing with
someone who did not believe in a higher power? If you only believed you would die and go into
a hole in the ground and nothing happened beyond that or no one was to judge you in a later life
then what difference would it make if you lied or cheated your fellow man? What difference
would it make if you can get away with it today if no one was to judge you later? Kind of scary
isn’t it? Would be like handing out money that was not backed by anything. Not much good to
anyone or anything. Just my opinion but it is mine to do with as I see fit.
So anyway after I relax and get myself feeling good I will attempt to contact Sal again and
I have no doubt that I will be seeing him in the near future.

 

Chapter Thirteen
It comes upon each of us at some point in our lives when we do what we want to do and
just know that it will turn out right. Settling down in the recliner and relaxing I knew before
starting that somehow some way I was going to figure out how to find whatever Sal left and prove
to the world that our lives are just a blink away. Time has meaning only to keep track of small
things. Those that are bigger and more important require no time keepers, clocks, or calendars. I
could see Sal from the moment I let myself go into this world of relaxation and clearing my mind
of all other thoughts. Sal was back at his camp fire stooped over holding a fire in pan, trying to
get it level and part way into the fire. Pacer was standing behind him with only inches between
the back of Sal’s head watching as he worked the coals around the fire pan.
Not wanting to disturb this I try to let them know I am there without speaking. I can see
that Sal notices my presence though because of the way he moves his head. Pacer has stepped
back and is looking around also so obviously he also knows I am there. We Verl are you going to
say something are or you going to just stand there and watch the old master roll out the grub?
Getting pretty sure of yourself these days aren’t you Sal? Well you have come up to me so many
times I was starting to feel like I should be baking a cake or something. It’s amazing to me that
you always seem to catch me when I am alone and taking it easy. Well that is easy to explain
because you spend most of your time alone and you never do anything so how could it be different?
Would really be strange if I could catch you working. What kind of nonsense it that I work from
seem to can’t see and hardly ever get down off of old Pacers back. That’s what I am talking about
all was riding around doing nothing. If it can’t be done out of a saddle I can’t do it. When I hired
on I told him that and make damn sure he knew I only stepped down to rest or relieve myself.
Damned if I were going to get down for wages. Guys got to have standards in this life if he expects
to get to the end without being all stove up.
Kind of relaxing to set out here under the stars every night and not worry about where the
next meal is coming from or if the rent is going to be paid. Rent what are you taking about Verl?
Well when you buy a house you have to pay the bank or if you don’t own it you pay rent to use it
don’t you? Hell he I am over twenty and never in my life paid a dime rent, never even heard of it.
As to owning a bank, I have never borrowed ten cents on credit and don’t owe a man in this world
anything. My dad built a house, settled the ground, dug a well, built a barn and a chicken coop.
Planted the garden, and raised us kids and not one of us ever saw a bank. I was twelve years old
before I saw a pair of boots that were not homemade. Why would you borrow money just to live?
We can’t get anything in my day without owing somebody for it. If you saved enough money to
buy property by the time you saved up enough the cost would have risen so that you would be
saving and saving and never get it. Well around here Verl if someone tells you he will sale you
something for 500 bucks he had damn well better have the deed ready and waiting when I get there
with the money and I don’t care if I am two years getting there with it.
Times have changed big time over the years as you are standing here today Abe Lincoln is
just about to put into place the first taxes in the U.S. to pay for the war that is just about to take
place. You have to know of all the problems that are taking place in the country right now. What
have you heard about splitting up the country and the North putting together an army and the South
is doing the same thing. Of course I have heard stories here and there but right now it is hard to
say what is going to happen with all the talk. Well believe me the Civil War is just about to explode
and things are going to get real bad around here right away. Let me warn you there are many who
will go off to war and come home to nothing. What the Army don’t take the tax man will, you can
write that down and sleep on it flat out promise you are about to enter the worst fighting this
country has ever saw. Is that why you say I will not live that much longer? No that has nothing
to do with it. You just continue on doing your thing and don’t worry about any of that you have
other stuff going on.
After you left I sent some time trying to write my name and finally got a gal down at the
dry goods store to show me more and now I can write Sal all by myself. So now I went down and
found a rock and wrote my name on it. Sal Oldmire Smith of course I can’t spell Oldmire or
Smith either but I done wrote Sal with a sharp rock on here and you can take a look for yourself
and see what a great job I done did. Sal has anyone ever said anything to you about not being able
to read or write? Nobody I know is got guts enough to say anything about it and I only know of a
few that can do any better any way. What do you need to read for? I haven’t got anything to read
anyway and I don’t know anyone to write to so why go to all that trouble?
This is as good a starting point as any. What I want you to do is go down by the river and
find the biggest rock or something that has a good chance of being there for a long time and I will
come back to here and try to find it. Go north to the river and look along there for something.
Don’t worry Verl it’s as good as done and I will put my rock under it. Bye Sal. So Long Partner.

 

Chapter Fourteen
You know Pacer sometimes he is a pain in the butt. Almost like having a second mother
to watch out for you. Kind of think I would like to know how much time I have left before they
call me to the grave but on the other hand it would be good not to know. Well lets get our rear
ends out of here.
Great day for a ride Pacer what else could one be doing that is more fun? Say look up there
somebody is coming our way. Well I’ll be damned if it’s not lazy Lou. Hello Sal what puts you
on the road to recovery so early? Changing pastures just to see what is on the other side was going
into town and maybe see the sheriff. Don’t think I would do that if I were you Sal, I have heard
from a few that he is going to find an excuse to put you under. Why would he do that Lou? Don’t
know for sure but Sal did you hear or see something that has to do with the sheriff? Ya! Lou I did
and in my mind I believe he had something to do with the stage robbery last month. Sal you are
stupid as a mule if you think he is going to let you tell the world about that. Don’t you know Sal
he has never been elected to the sheriff’s office he just stepped in and they accepted him because
he says he was this and that and just kind of moved into the old office and now he gets money for
fines and some say he has a back door right into the county purse. You come out and tell stuff like
this would look bad for him. Don’t think I would want to be you right now but I sure would not
be riding out her where God and all can see me for miles. Damn Lou you think that he would bush
whack me? If I were Wheaner I would put a hole in you so fast you would be two weeks catching
on that you were dead rather than give up on the gravy train he is riding. Hell Sal he gets free
drinks at the bar, free meals at the cafe and paid to watch his men push the rest of us around and
you ask that? Well if he is not an elected official and I was to face him they couldn’t say much if
I laid him away could they? Don’t count on it but if there has to be a choice I wouldn’t give him
a chance to back shot me if I were you. Well Lou thanks for the heads up but think I have plenty
to do right now with out setting out here a jawing with you. Well Sal just keep your powder dry
and I will see you in the spring if we can make it through the mattress. So long Lazy.
Maybe a good thing we ran into him Pacer can’t never tell where this is headed but I think
I will follow Verl’s warning and go right on in and see who is running the paper and tell that guy
or woman a story and what they do with it will be up to them. Right now the only one knows
anything is Lou and for two beer and a cigar he wouldn’t remember ever seeing me. Stepping
down off his horse and entering the printing office Sal notices several men watching him and sees
one head toward the sheriffs office. “Can I help you?” the sweet little thing says to Sal. Yes!
Mama sure enough can is there someone here who would like a story to go with their tee? Mr.
Brown just stepped out for lunch but maybe I can help you. What has this got to do with? The
stage holdup last week mama I was the guy who came along and helped get the thing out of the
river and back to town. They said the only one that knew anything was the stage driver Tom and
he was knocked unconscious when the stage tipped over. That is right handy all right but maybe
you wonder how it got tipped over in the river and Tom didn’t drown? Then the next question that
would come to mind is how did he ever get it back up alone? Kind of strange and also why hasn’t
somebody else ask these questions? Where did all that money go? How come Tom can’t
remember how many was there or how he got into that fix? What is your name? Salmon mama
but my friends call me Sal. Mr. Sal? No ma’am I am Sal my dad was Mr. Smith. Well Mr. Smith
I will call you Sal if you will put that ma’am in a sack and burry it. Sounds right down homey to
me. But I would like to make sure you understand that I was the one who got the stage out of the
river and damn near drowned doing it. Tom came around real fast like when I started to tie a rope
on his ankle to drag him out of there. I didn’t care because I had plenty to do in just a short breath
so I just pushed him back up on the seat and tied the rope around the front horse and started yelling
and pulling. Those horses pulled back like they didn’t want to get out of the water so I jumped
down to see if they were tied to the bottom and they almost ran over me when I got under their
feet. Turned out the front left horse was shot in the front right shoulder. Try to figure that one out
Ma’am. Not ma’am Sal it’s Alice. OK Alice can you imagine the two horses standing side by
side and the bullet hits the shoulder between them? Well I got them to movin and they came out
of there so fast I hung on just to keep from being drowned. They drug me up on the bank and was
starting to run when Tom got them settled down and then got down and helped me up. Now after
all this he doesn’t remember anyone else being there? Kind of tries ones imagination doesn’t it?
Well Alice I want to sign that paper you just wrote all that stuff on but I only know how to write
Sal so ifen you want the smith you will just have to wait for me to learn how to put er down. OK
Sal you just reach over and sign and initial this and if anyone ask I can tell them you told me and
then signed the paper. OK now I have signed where do you want those initials? Initial every line
Sal. OK here. What is this SOS Sal? May be more than I wanted it to be when the sheriff see’s
what I have told but my name is Salmon Oldmire Smith or SOS when I was a kid they tried to
make fun of it but after a couple of broken noses they decided Sal was good enough. Well I
certainly glad to have meet you Sal because this story makes a lot more sense than what was told
in the paper. I can’t figure Alice why they would leave out the part about me unless they had
decided I was not long for this world and nobody would ever know. You wouldn’t understand
Alice but I thought this over for over a hundred and fifty years and finally decided to tell my story.
Would you care to explain that to me Sal? No Alice I don’t think we have the time for it and if I
did you wouldn’t print what I just told you so we will leave it at that and I will say good day to
you.
With that Sal stepped out of the shop and was facing two men who had their hands on their
guns which were still in the holster. One stepped up to Sal and said, “the Sheriff would like to see
you.” Nice day for that and Sal hit him with a left to the jaw and the guy went back against a post.
The next guy went for his gun and found he had one sticking just above the belt buckle and looked
up into Sal’s eyes. Twist just a mite and it may go off my friend says Sal. He just stood there and
looked right into Sal’s eyes and anyone with two marbles and a taw would know he was looking
into death for sure. Maybe I should explain the guy says. Yea maybe you should find another
kind of work because when I leave town if we should ever meet again your mother will be crying
over your worthless hide. Let me explain the Sheriff said we were to bring you down there and he
didn’t say maybe. Well when you get back you tell him you made two mistakes, one was taking
the job and the next was not leaven town last night. You are going to be one sorry slob when the
Sheriff gets done with you. Well Mr. Gunman what happens to me will be right behind what
happens to you so if you stick around you will not be able to see my smile anyway. If you can’t
get that pistol out any faster than that you should maybe look for a job washing dishes or
something. So now you just unhook that gun belt and lay it over the railing right there and you
can head for the barn. The man started to unbuckle and Alice stepped out of the printing office
and he stopped and looked up. What is happening Sal? Well Alice you are just in time to watch
a fool die. The belt hit the railing with a thud and the guy turned and ran. Sal you don’t seem to
be very popular around here today. I just happen to be that type of range hand; everyone wants to
see my butt and not my face. So long Alice don’t let the print puddle under your feet before writing
what I told you. Yes, I will and watch those P’s and Q’s Sal.*
After leaving Alice Sal walked down the street to the Sheriff’s office and walked in just
like he owned the place. The Sheriff Wheaner was setting behind his desk feet up and leaning
back in a chair. A deputy was cleaning a rifle at another desk and as Sal walked in the deputy
turned and tried to pull a pistol from below the desk. Sal said just keep on raising it and make sure
your finger is not on the trigger or it will never work again. The deputy brought up the gun and
laid it on the desk. Now Sal said stand up and put those you have on the desk real slow and careful
like. After doing so Sal said now just stand up and walk right back to the back cell and close the
door behind you as you enter. The hell I will, he says. OK with me pal I don’t have to dig the
hole. Slam the door closed and was locked very loudly. Now Mr. Wheaner you have let it be
known that this old coon was through hunting. Now who said that Sal? It doesn’t matter in the
least I believe I will put a small round hole right in the center of those two beady little brown spots
you look through. Now why would you do that Sal? Seems to me it will be very soon when you
think you are safe to stop the talking and start shooting. So just for the fun of it I came in here to
clean up the stage problem and get the hound off my trial. You can’t shoot a Sheriff and get away
with it Sal. That is kind of funny you see Wheaner a Sheriff is elected and I don’t remember voting
for you. So your death can’t be listed as a Sheriff but it can be listed as a Stage Coach robber, a
man posing as an elected officer and maybe I could find a few other things to throw in. Makes no
neither mind to me because if I wait long enough it will be too late and I have nothing to lose and
everything to gain. Do you want it where you are setting or would you like to get on your knees
and pray first? You wouldn’t shot a defenseless man would you Sal? No but I would step on a
rattle snake and never look back. Where did you put the money from the stage Wheaner? You
know you could have gotten away if you would have paid no attention to me and just let me go
but you had to start throwing your wait around and piss me off. We could make a split and give
you enough to last the rest of your life Sal. Ya two dollars would do for the rest of my life the way
you would shorten it. No Wheaner I came to punch your ticket and I am going to do it. The Sheriff
had put his feet on the floor and as Sal turned to look at the deputy he rolled out of the chair and
went under the desk. As Sal raised his pistol to shoot a shot from the window was heard and the
Sheriff grunted and rolled away from the desk with blood coming out of the side of his head. Sal
looked up into the eyes of Dib and Roy was right beside him. How did you know? Was all Sal
could say. Roy said we heard about a price being put on your head and we knew all hell was going
to break when we saw you heading for the Sheriff’s office. So here we are and a damn good thing
at that. Can’t thank you two enough but if you will walk over to the bar I will attempt to show my
gratitude.
*Note: When printing on the press the type was set in back words so a p and q could be put in
wrong

 

Chapter Fifteen
After leaving Roy and Dib to finish loading the barley Sal stagers out of the bar and heads
for Pacer to get out of town and just then it comes to him his problems are not over so he turns
around to go back in just as a bullet hits the post. He turns and sees Tom the stage coach driver
taking aim again after missing. Without taking any time to aim he draws and fires as fast as
possible and Tom goes down. Tom is trying to raise his gun again when Roy steps out of the bar
and puts his foot on Toms gun. Sal you are about as lucky a guy as a four leaf clover what
happened? I was just about to step off the sidewalk and get Pacer when it came to me that Tom
was still out there and he would try to keep me from telling the story so I was turned to come back
and tell you guys when he fired my turning is what saved my hide. Well Sal we will put him in
the cell with the deputy and get the Doc over here to take a look at his shoulder. How come you
missed? Well Roy he didn’t give me a chance to take aim just had to lay to it as best as I could.
Thanks again Roy, I will see you later. Sounds good Sal but try to get back here as soon as possible
because I will bet a new paint pony they will want to make you Sheriff. Ever see a Star pinned on
the back of a shirt Roy? No can’t say’s I have. Well that is where they will have to pin it if they
can run fast enough. Come on Pacer lets show how you got that name.
Sal had remembered that he had promised Verl to hide that stupid rock he had so pain fully
chipped his name into. Following the Big Creek for a ways trying to find a place easy to the trail
and not a long ride out. When I talk to Verl next there are a few things I need to tell him; one is
he keeps talking about Hays and I have no idea where that is and it keeps skipping my mind but
when he is around that is easy to do. Maybe I should ride North to the Saline and see if I can find
something up there. Damn buffalo are always in the way when you want to make time getting so
you can’t go anywhere around here without running into a heard. The grass here is so pretty that
I can see why that little guy is here painting pictures all the time. He seems to see things from a
different eye than the rest of us but he sure can paint. Good thing this trail is so handy it at least
keeps me from wondering all over the country. What a beautiful sight that is; just look at that river
will you and there must be a million pigeons out here. The buff know the water is good so that is
why so many of them and here. I think I will spend the night along here somewhere and see if I
can find something in the morning that will do the job. Pacer I am wondering if Verl got the name
wrong or the location? There is nowhere around here by the name of hays, they have been talking
about building a fort up here on the river but haven’t started it to my recollection and I haven’t
heard them even speaking of that name. Just what we need is the Army up here protecting us
which is a crock beyond belief. If they would go home and stay out of things the Indians would
not be fighting. Can’t imagine why the U.S. Army can’t get it in their heads that every time they
come out here and sign another stupid peace treaty which they never figure on keeping in the first
place then they break it and the Indians get mad. If I didn’t have more to do I would join them in
raising hell with those stupid idiots from Washington. They send the young ones to West Point to
see if they can pound sand down a rat hole and if they can they make General. The Indians are so
much better at fighting than the Army that the Army has to make up for it with lies.
This is as good a place as any to make camp and the Cheyenne will most likely be getting
ready for a hunt so I should be safe tonight. Just on the safe side I will not put hobbles on Pacer.
Last time an Indian tried to steal him was the most fun I have had in a long time. Do you remember
that Pacer? Woke me up when he started to yell and cuss trying to get away. Not many have ever
saw a mad horse. You play a great game old boy just stand and play dump till they get ready to
go then stop and just roll over on em. Plenty of wood around here and can walk down to the river
for water so let’s see if we can catch a fish for supper. I will start the fire and that way we will
have plenty of coals when we get back with supper.
Now that was what I call fit for a king Pacer. Biggest Cat I have caught in a long time and
with a few wild onions and a few greens can’t complain at all. Coffee always taste twice as good
out here under the stars that back in town. Pacer you have to agree that a fifteen foot high rock
mountain will stand a lot of years even with the snow and wind. What makes it even better is with that
small cave it will be easy to tell Verl that it is two steps in front of the cave and two feet down. Who is
going to dig two feet down to find a rock when the mountain is right there and they can have all the rocks
they want? It really wasn’t that tuff to dig with the overburden from the falling cliff and all plus after
getting through the lose rock we had plain old soil. Can’t complain about the job of hiding that stone even
if it couldn’t be done from the saddle.
Well I’ll be drug by a beaver and strung to a lodge looks like our old friend Verl is back.
Yes Sal I am here and can’t wait to learn what I can about the why of things. What are you talking
about Verl? Chuckling and laughing he says you forget you don’t have to tell me I can read your
mind. What want to know is why did you confront the Sheriff after going into the Printing Office
that should have been enough to prove your point. Well Verl by the time I left the Printing Office
I had thought it over and decided that the Sheriff was not going to push me and I was pissed off
just talking about it to Alice so decided to do something about it. You could have gotten killed
you know. Now that is one possibility that crossed my mind then I remembered you saying I was
going to die after walking into a cabin out in the middle of nowhere. Now if what you say is true
why worry about the Sheriff? Hell I could fact ten men and if I am to die as you say I could be a
hero. Ya you keep pushing it and you will change my prediction big time. I came back to get you
to tell others about what you knew and to free the horse but where in history does it say it has to
be the way I say so you had better back off just a little and not try so hard for the hero stuff. Don’t
let it bother you so much I am right handy with this little pistol. That may be but Roy and Dib
standing in the window on the other side of the desk didn’t hurt any either. To stop and turn when
you did and Tom to take that shot at you at exactly that second was beyond lucky. And by the way
that was one hell of a shot to draw from behind that post and still hit him, got to give you credit
for that one. I have been trying to tell you ever sense you started to hang around that I was pretty
good with this thing haven’t I? Ya and now let’s get back to the rock that you burred it is not there
and the river is no long flowing where it was it now has been moved a little to the south and there
are no boulders or cliff’s where you put the rock so we have to try another idea. Just a minute
there Verl that Cliff was at least fifty feet high even if the river was moved the rocks still have to
be there. Sal a fifty foot bank in my world would be like moving an ant hill to you. We have
dozers that can rip rocks out big as a covered wagon and not even slow down. They wouldn’t even
have to use dynamite on it just walk in a take it out might take till noon but if it were really big it
could take a full day.. We have got to find a better way than this, go back and get the rock and see
if you can think of somewhere else and I will do the same. Say hasn’t that town or village you are
going to for beer have a big rock building? Seems like I saw a two story building down there
toward the villiage. Yes there is a big building down there and there are some really big homes
that are made out of rock too but not like they were ment to last. Go by there and see if you can
figure out a place that would work down there. OK Verl will go tomorrow. Bye Sal good luck.

 

Chapter Sixteen
Sal this is Verl again need to learn a little more. Verl are you sure you are really me? I
mean it’s hard for me to imagine I could drop to such a level of dimwittedness. Sal why would
you say something so rude and off the wall? Well to begin with you show up here with stuff
available to you that we have never heard of talking about something from another world and yet
you couldn’t find a tree in a pig pen. Remember there is at least one hundred and fifty years
between us and you don’t know how to read or write and I have to lean on your shoulders to find
a way to hid this thing. Well am I to gather from all of this that you didn’t find my rock? Yes that
is correct I haven’t found anything yet. I have lots and lots of questions about what is to come of
the country if we have goings on like you describe. I get it that you have been talking to others
about our little situation. No Verl I haven’t but that don’t stop me from wondering what will
become of us. You said all politicians are crooks and that makes me wonder because we have
some here who started out rich and are now broke from trying to make our world a better place.
First not all of our politicians are crooks but it is very very true that they have proven money is
worth more than brains. How’s that? Let me tell you of the first thing that comes to mind we had
a Senator who told us right out that we would have to pass this Health Care plan if we were to
understand it. Now in your world would you buy a horse to find out if you could ride it? Another
way would you spend your money buying anything so you could find out if it was any good? No
Verl I am not stupid. Well she proved to those of us that the only reason she is in office is because
she has more money than brains. I got mad because she thought that I would buy her story as those
around me did, which made me realize how dumb our society had become to listen to this stuff.
Sal they had a program for us that while I grew up they made me pay part of my income to support
this program and if I didn’t pay into it I would have gone to jail. They call it Social Security so
they get all this money into it then like a bunch of Foxes in the hen house they began to take that
money and give it away. I am telling the God honest truth they stole it and put it into another
account and gave the money to those they felt should have it. Then they turned around and said it
is broke and they have no money to pay us and we don’t deserve it anyway. I could go on and on
but the story is the same anyway it is told, the American people are being sold out by politicians
as fast as they can get into office. They tried every way they could to take away or guns but thank
God we have a bunch of us who belong to a National Rifle Association and we have raised hell to
the point they wouldn’t dare take our guns. If they were to start that we would have exactly what
you are facing right now and don’t know it. You are about to be drug into civil war which will
bring brother against brother and neighbor against neighbor. Many lives will be lost and a big
reason is to free the slaves and if there is any humor in this story it is to tell you that over a hundred
years later they never mention those whites that lost their lives trying to free the slaves. No it is
about the blacks who had family that were slaves. I mean like we go to war to free em then some
of them who had family that were slaves get mad like no gratitude at all in what was done. It is
truly not over yet the book is still being written about this issue and some of the most intelligent
minds in the country are blacks and they even get mad at this issue. I will warn you that you will
not live long enough to fight in the war but it will be a real bloody and tragic part of our history.
Well I hope this answers some of your questions because I really don’t like this subject and would
gladly forget about it.
To turn to a better subject let’s get back to how you are going to leave something where I
can find it. Well how am I supposed to know what is going to last and what isn’t? I have read
where you are and think I have a pretty good idea and think you are just South of where Hays
Kansas will be located in the next few years. I have read that there is a hill out North of you that
is the first Boot Hill in the West do you know of this place? Yes I do because I would bet two
bear claws and a beaver tail that is where they will bury the Sheriff. Maybe you could go down
there and find a spot and burry the rock. Would anyone say anything to you if you were to go
down there and dig? Yes they would they would say have you fell on your head Sal. If anyone
were to see me using a pick and shovel could ruin my reputation real bad. Several of my friends
wouldn’t even drink with me if they found out. I do have a little problem there and that is where
would I get the head stone? If I made one out of wood it may not make it for that long. It seems
to me that I could just go down to the bank and put it in the vault and they would watch out for it.
Sal there is not a building to my knowledge that will be here that was built during your time. They
have some rock houses that would have to be ripped down because they are built to last and a fire
may ruin the roof but those walls would last forever. And I thought you didn’t want to go digging
in a cemetery. I don’t but I am running out of ideas. It the situation were reversed I could send it
to you with the post office and you may not even get it then? What is the post office? Another
thing our great and wonderful government has found to put money into and the only way you can
get a job there,,, forget it they are losing money so fast that only those that couldn’t pour piss out
of a boot with the directions on the heal can find a reason to keep it going. Like I said you have
to have money and no brains to get a job with the government and if you don’t have money it’s all
right the money will come. Why don’t you vote em out? There are so many that work for the
government that who would vote against cutting out their own jobs? The only way this can ever
be corrected Sal is to have an understanding with every citizen. If you take money from the
government you can’t vote. Have to Make a few exceptions on that military have no choice so
they get to vote those that paid into the account I told you about should be able to vote and collect
because they paid in. If you buy Bond and stuff like that and get money for interest you get to
vote buy others lose the right to vote. Then we would get some changes to the good. You sound
bitter toward the government Verl, I am and so it most like me. Sal let me tell you the newspaper
where you are writes what is happening and try’s to tell the truth well that changes as time goes
on we have bigger and better ways to get the news out but it is controlled by a few with lots of
money. Right now our President could take a woman out on the white house lawn and rape her
and the news would say that she dressed to make others want to do that and they would tell how
great a man he was to stand up for the rights of all Americans by degrading them. For some reason
money has taken away all common sense and they think all of us are stupid and have to be told
what is best for us. You can’t take your own kid out and teach him how to shoot a gun how to ride
a horse what to take in his sack for lunch at school and I could go on forever. Why do they do
this? Oh this is to make them a better person the schools can’t take a stick to their bottom anymore
them must allow them to be free. Don’t sound like I want any part of that world. Sal there is more
books and writings about the Americans in your time than you would ever imagine and the reason
is we are jealous of what you had and people from all walks of life love to read of your heroes.
Didn’t know we had any hero’s must have been while I was out of town and nobody has bothered
to tell me about em either. Do have some short stories about some of the gunfighters but we don’t
look at em as hero’s and some just want to fight with this so called hero’s. Nobody loves a good
fight moren me and I would go out of my way to try one of em just to see if they are up to sniff.
Got friends that would stand in line for go at another guy known for fighting. Friend of mine by
the name of Roy who was at the sheriff office that night would ride a hundred miles on a donkey
just to get get a go at one of these guys and the rest of us would walk barefoot right to the side of
him just to watch. Don’t know what it’s like where you are Verl but out here we go to the dances
just to fight. Nothing like a good fight to settle an argument and if we can’t find something to
argue about we will fight and then argue over who won. Lazy Lou got into one last week end and
if the guy hadn’t of hit him Lou wouldn’t have known there was a fight. Guy called him lazy and
Lou thought he was just talking about the weather. Knocked Lou down and he looked up into face
of the guy leaning over him and ask why he went and done that? Guy kicked him and said cause
your lazy. Lou say’s you didn’t hit Dib because he is Dib. So the guy says well he is not stupid.
Lou says well now that is different and kicked him and from there the fight was on. When the
fighting was all done Lou bent down and took the guys purse out of his belt and took a dollar out,
the guy looked up and ask what that was for and Lou told him for the bottle I had in my back
pocket you broke and if there is any glass left in my butt I will be back for you to kiss it better.

 

Chapter Seventeen
Are you still here Verl? Do you think I would leave and miss all this fun? Guess in your
world this must have changed this is Saturday night to us, gives us something to talk about all
week long. During the fun it came to me about you saying a women was in the government doing
all this stuff does that mean they can vote too? Yes Sal let me tell you what went on in 1848
which was just the year before last to you in Seneca Falls New York they had a convention and it
was called “Declaration of Sentiments” where they were the first to stand for women’s rights. Four
years later Susan B. Anthony joined the fight and continued it on the right of suffrage. And I
might add that years later she was again praised and had a U.S. coin made in her memory. Any
way it took all the way till Aug. 18, 1920 before it finally became final. It was called the nineteenth
amendment to the constitution. Many jokes about it have come and gone but in truth it was like
most things for the better. The only problem comes from some of those that use the system for
their own benefit and then try to say they are doing a civic duty. I say let them do that duty for
free and we will see how deep the duty runs. Well Verl isn’t there something we can do to save
the country from all this? Not when 48 % of the people think that is how it is to be done. Let me
make a comparison here Sal suppose you were to put a hundred dollars in the bank and the bank
manager took ten dollars and gave it to Lazy Lou how would you feel? Real easy I would go shoot
the manager then I would find Lazy Lou and get back my money if he wants some go earn it. This
sounds like a church deal Verl why would they pass the plate in banks? This is not just banks Sal
this is for every one and every business in the country. Why would they do that? Well now Sal
we have to have an Army to protect us from other countries and it started out that way in fact I
think the first taxes imposed on us started with your President Lincoln had to I think to pay for the
war that is just about to happen. In 1797 they had an estate tax and it was stopped and started
several times; now we have Federal income tax, gift taxes, State income tax, Corporation tax, sales
tax and you can’t buy anything today without paying a tax on it. Damned if I would pay them
taxes. Then if you didn’t they would give you money because you are pour and have nothing.
Why would I work then? Have generations of people who have never done a day’s work in their
lives. Wow! We have really gone downhill haven’t we? Well half of our country think this is the
only way to live the other half feels like you do and because of that we have lots of problems.
Those on one side refuse to listen to those on the other side. We have trillions of dollars in debts
and borrow from other countries to keep our government running and want to borrow more.
What good will it do to prove that you can talk with me Verl? What difference can it make?
You live with a bunch of crooks and it sounds like they are on the brink of distinction. Ever been
around a chicken who had a sore? Well that is how the people are today in my world Sal they pick
at each other like chickens. If you make money they want part and if you don’t they get together
to fight those that do. Only difference is with you Sal if someone takes something from you then
it is OK to go take it back but not in my world. You are taught to cry and complain if you want
something not stand up for your rights. Bad subject here Sal we will never get anything
accomplished at this rate and it is so negative that it will take days to smile again. Better no one
knows where we are heading are they would be bigger problems faster than they are.
I will be back in touch with you I want to see if there are some areas that have been
preserved from your time to mine. Just a minute here I want to know if having a women vote
cause any problems? No not because they vote they have a right to but as I stand we have some
of the most corrupt women in the world in office and as you must know a bad women can be twice
a vicious as a man when they go after it. Normally a women will not kill another human like a
man will but they have no problem relieving us of our wallets and most in office today are so ugly
they couldn’t earn much otherwise so they steal it legally. Sal if I were rich I would start a
revolution in the country today and put a women in charge of it. I didn’t mean to put a women
down because they can be like a hunting dog on sent get em started and they will return the game.
That would be a real positive outcome from me talking with you Sal look what I could earn and
give back to those that need. Our problems in the country are not welfare it is the fact that we
make them take it and not give em a chance to earn for themselves. Strip the man of the chance
to walk upright seems to me is worse than poverty.
This gives us both something to work for Sal just think what we could do for our country
has more merit every way we could look at it. By Sal and thanks for the insight… So long Verl
and good luck.

 

Chapter Eighteen
Good morning Verl welcome to the world of sunshine. You have been sleeping for at least
ten hours and before that you sat in that chair for four hours to the point I started to worry about
you. I have learned that when you are in this other world it is like you are not even in the room.
Anna I may be here physically but I am sure not here mentally. Well what have you learned new
from Sal in this last visit? Really crazy Anna what keeps coming up while we talk. I want to have
him hide something for me to prove we are communicating and it just keeps going back to the fact
that he wants to know about this world and what is happening with our Government and it just
keeps coming up over and over. It’s like I am being led around by the nose and I am supposed to
do something about it. What could I possibly do that could make any difference in the United
States? I am a little old fat man who can’t even hear without hearing aids and they only work half
the time. You would think I could do something, he keeps asking me about this and that and why
this and about women voting and it is almost like he is saying to me go slay the dragon. Like
because I can talk one hundred and fifty years ago I have a certain power in this world. He as
much as indicated that I have saw things and know something that is not normal. I admit that not
many would be able to tell about life between lives and not to many have heard from God or saw
his light but what is there to indicate I have the ability to change anything. The fact I love you and
believe you understand more than most and you have the ability to solve problems makes me think
you have a special light shining with in you that was put there for a reason. Let me just ask you a
very simple question if you can and do talk to Sal do you think you could talk to someone else say
Abe Lincoln if you should decide to? Yes Anna I have talked with him before when I first started
this self-hypnosis I went down a flight of stairs and learned to relax and at the bottom of these
stairs was a door and upon entering the door I had several people setting at a table and it was my
thoughts that put them there. I had Abe Lincoln, Henry Ford, J. Paul Getty and several others at
the table and they answered my questions. I could go into that room with any number of problems
and ask any one of several for an answer and they told me what they would do. I sat at that table
with some of the greatest minds in the world and each time I went into that room I could decide
who would be there. What I am talking about is not all that far out in this subject many others
have done the same thing so I didn’t make this up I merely followed and learned how to do it. I
read once where knowledge is out there just floating in space and kind of like the electric cars in
San Francisco you just hook onto the waves and let the knowledge flow in. Some times when I
am talking with Sal I wonder if what he is telling me is really from him or maybe I had heard it
from somewhere before. I finally came to the conclusion is matters not just so the information
flows.
Verl I want to ask you something and we kind of got of track. If after talking with Sal you
could do anything in this world and nothing could stop you what would you do? Wow Anna that
is really dreaming but I can answer that right of the top of my head. I would start a movement of
Americans kind of like the “Tea Party” only I would not limit it like they have. I would have
people sign up that wanted to be proud our country, Americans that stood up for those soldiers that
gave their live for liberty I would ask the blacks that wanted a better life and was willing to forget
and sign they wanted to be proud again of being in American and were willing to stand as one not
black against white not black against black I mean a human that says we are one and will not accept
this phony crap they keep trying to push on all of us I mean what is this a black school and white
this and don’t tell me you have to have so many minority this or that hire the best and if the color
comes in your out. If you are a Mexican or any other race that came in illegally you are not allowed
ten cents in food stamps and you will be put to work for free and feed bread and water till you earn
enough to go back and start over. Enter our country as all others have legally. I would want this
party to run against the Democrats and the Republicans alike. They have gotten so strong they
forgot what an American really is and I would push to have a third party that didn’t ask for
women’s votes didn’t ask for minority votes, didn’t ask for anything but unity among us. Obama
ran on no races just all Americans and now he is splitting the country up like Pirates dividing the
bounty. If we had a strong third party the other two would either get involved in Americans growth
or fall to the side. Politicians today are like a bunch of kids in a school yard. Nana nana nana and
stick out their tongues president of the United States is in a pissing contest like a skunk. When
you listen to what is being said it almost makes you wonder if they got out of grade school or not.
Congress can’t figure out how to cut spending and the Senate can’t spend it fast enough. Yes Anna
I would ask the women to vote but not like the Democrats or the GOP it would be to vote in our
own group and be asking for help in leading and better ideas. Somehow we have lost in the reality
of life and I would really love to be part of bringing it back.
Maybe your ability to reach through the grave is part of your ability to unite the dream we
all need to become the country of the world as our for fathers were. What you want is not a lot
different than what a lot of other Americans want you only need to let them know the road is
available and I will bet there would be many who would stand right to you side to see it happen.

 

Chapter Nineteen
So after all this and knowing what you do Verl what is going to happen now? I am limited
to being a human and only having the ability of those things that can be accomplished by mortal
man so to unite the home front and rally around the flag would be very hard to do with no money
to work with when you put that into the equation. Have you got any idea how Sal can hide anything
and would it really help? Stop and think about this Anna, if I could tell Sal to put a rock in
something and then find it I could then show you or anybody else the rock and lets say that you
want me to have him put something else in it I could do that and we would find what every you
chose to have, now do that again and you say change that to this and I would find this there could
be no end to it. You would have to admit it eventually and that would prove with out a doubt I
could communicate with him. Now the next step could be determined by somebody who had
something more important to do but they would know for a fact that I could talk with Sal. With
out a doubt the next thing that would come it someone would want me to talk with a relative or
maybe a president and change history by having them do something different. Stop and think
about that what if I told Sal where God was found in one of the Gold fields and he was to get there
before anyone knew about them. Look at the Gold in California that was found in the streams
suppose we sent someone there back in 1860 or even 1760 the outcome could be unreal. Suppose
we wanted to change history like the Alamo we could go to Santa Anna before the last man was
killed and maybe change his mind as to what happened. We would be able to change history in so
many ways that it would change what we do today. How about if we were to have the men in the
second world war figure out how to build the atomic bomb and dropped it five years sooner in
Japan? How about something a lot simpler how about I stepped back and had someone shot Hitler
when he was twelve years old? Now what would the outcome be?
I am not sure that messing in things like that would be a positive out come but I could very
well do it. The subject will get out of hand if we were to continue thinking of stuff like suppose
we were to go to the builders of the Titanic and convince them it would sink, and could get them
to listen look at the lives we could save. Just how far do you think God would allow this to go and
would he step in and stop it? Another idea how about I go to watch the Wright brothers fly the
first airplane and help with just a little something and I become one of them then history would
say the Wright Brothers and Verl. Maybe I could be one of the original owners of Bowing
Aircraft? Anna this could go on till Howard Hughes was working for me. With just a little
imagination I could re-write what rich is. Only thing I can tell you for sure is nobody has a bigger
imagination than you do Verl. I am just afraid that if you continue with this type of thinking
someone up there on the other side of the pearly gates is going to say enough is enough and put
their foot down and it will be on your head.
I can tell you for sure that every person I have ever heard of that could tell the future or
had the ability to even come close to this has said the power was only to be used for positive and
not for personal profit. Years ago a guy in Vegas would have them throw the dice in the air at a
crap table and he would tell them the numbers before the dice stopped rolling. That guy would
play in the casino all night then he would mark a keno ticket just before going home and get his
money back but only just enough to cover losses. Maybe what I should do is quit fooling around
with this stuff in the past with Sal and start thinking of the future and just go win a lottery ticket
and forget the hole thing. Shouldn’t bother anyone if I just won ten or eleven straight lottery tickets
would it? Do you think you could do that? Have never tried to go forward but the woman in Santa
Cruz who told me to go set Pacer free said it was just as easy to go forward as it was to go back. I
just never really tried but I am not sure that I could just drop this thing with Sal anyway I have
kind of enjoyed his large stories and would truly miss spending what time I could with him anyway.
Rather we prove anything will depend upon our finding a way to hide it where nobody else would
destroy the hidey hole. Not only that but if I continue to mess around with it and don’t go do some
of that goofy stuff I can’t believe anyone would care. Just to talk with Sal up to now hasn’t caused
me to feel like I was infringing upon a major interference of any kind. Surely someone or
something would have came between me and my thinking and not only that after what I have gone
through I am sure it is with Gods blessings. Why else would he have shown me the light on that
mountain and besides that from that day to this I can set down and in a couple of minutes be taking
to Sal. I have no doubt that my deities has approved of my visits and like the Indians my sprits
seem to flow with the whole idea.
Maybe what we should do is take a few days vacation and just take it easy and after a little
time off we pursue the subject again and go from there. What do you think Anna? Sounds like a
good plan to me and I would kind of like to avoid this subject for a few days anyway. What a
sweet heart you are Anna. Make plans and we will go somewhere and enjoy the world.
I have been checking the air lines to see what places we should go to and have not made
any decisions what would you like to do Verl. I thought it may be fun to drive down to Santa Cruz
and on to Monterey for a few days. Oh no you don’t that is just what I would expect from you.
You want to go to Santa Cruz and try to find that physic you meet down there years ago but that
is not going to happen we have agree to let it lay for a few days and get away from it. You know
you will see things a lot better if you step away and then return with a fresh outlook so don’t try to
push me in that area. But you know what a view the ocean is down there and so many things to
do along the coast. Well if you want the coast then lets go North up into the Redwoods along the
coast. But we have been to those so many times that it would just be old hat again. All right then
it’s back to the airlines and we will be leaving on Monday for a trip to somewhere in the middle
of Montana for a little fishing that I know you will want to do. Just like a woman go out a pay
good money to get away and we could do it right here. Yea! just like a woman have to force a guy
to do what he would do anyway if he could only see his noise in front of his face.

 

Chapter Twenty
Sal got a suggestion for you if you are ready to listen. Yes Verl go ahead what have you
got in mind? Got to be a stone house around there someplace that is two or three stories high
haven’t you? Ya there are a few of them but most are not in town they are owned by some big
rancher or something. Why don’t you go out to one of those and see if you can burry something
in their yard? That would be real smart all right I can see it now I will ride up to one of these fancy
houses on old Pacer holding a shovel and say, “Mister you will never in a hundred years guess
what I have in mind”? How’s that sound Verl? Think he will offer me food and drink while I dig
a hole in his back yard? When you talked about those around you being kind of dull in the knife
area I didn’t know you were that dull of a blade yourself, don’t leave much hope for my future
does it? Well now you mention it Sal by the time I get there the place will have concrete sidewalks
all around it and I would have to take a jack hammer to find the stuff. Don’t know what a jack
hammer is but if it is used to find brains you better order two.
I haven’t got much time to mess around here today Sal my wife is getting ready to take me
on a little vacation to try and get me away from all this; so there is not much time between visits
for me but on this end you have to understand I can go two months and when I show up there to
you it could be only minutes. I am getting real good at timing each trip so that you have a little
rest in between. Sal this can’t be that tuff to figure out how, long are you figuring on staying in
this place? Got to be a better area to hide something than out there in the flats of Kansas where
every thing looks the same. If you were in Arizona we could go to the Mongolian rim or the grand
canyon as you remember? Another place that would work Sal would be in South Dakota they have
some mountains that would allow us to find a cave or something that would be saved for today.
You want me to just up and leave this area just because you want me to hide a rock? No wonder
you can’t get any politicians, what have you got for school teachers? The more we talk the less I
think about what the future is going to be. You guys couldn’t lead a horse to water like as been
said forever, you guys would starve to death in a corn field. This may surprise you Sal but there
are hundreds and hundreds of people who couldn’t start a fire in a pit if you gave em the matches.
Then there are others that start a fire and don’t have brains enough to put it out when they leave it.
How could a person not start a fire with a match? Explain that to me? No one has taught them
how to do it they would throw all the tree in and try to start it. Many things that you do Sal are
just old hat to you but if something should happen and the people of my time couldn’t go to the
store at least once a week they would starve to death. Hell Verl once a week? Week don’t get to
the store once a month and then we are lucky to. The government sends out checks to half of the
country now that is what I am trying to tell you we have became a country of independents. Not
one in ten thousand could walk into the forest and live thirty days with on their own. Wouldn’t
know how to stay warm, wouldn’t know how to cook over the open fire if they knew how to build
it. They would be depending on someone else for every thing and to say other wise would be a lie
for sure. People can’t possibly be that dumb Verl what are you trying to tell me? This is not a
stretch of the imagination I promise you. We have gotten so bad that a man dare not stand up for
himself for fear of going to jail. You can’t tell someone you are going to hurt them and for damn
sure if you told them you would shoot them you would be locked up in a hurry. Now that has got
to be a lie why would they lock me up if I shot you for threatening me? You walk up to me Verl
and tell me you are going to shoot me and you won’t live long enough to wipe your nose. We
have many many problems for that very reason and it can’t be helped. In your world Sal if someone
was to burn down your house rape your wife and kill the kids you would hunt them down and get
even right? That is a stupid question Verl I would not rest and neither would any one even a
stranger would help me hang em. Well in my world if you caught them and shot one you spend
more time and money that you would ever imagine. If it happened to me Sal I would shoot them
then just shoot myself and get it over. Now maybe you can see why the government is taking over
and we have no rights at all. They have been picking at us a little at a time till you can’t go to
town and have a drink and get home with out some one who don’t drink taking you home. What
do you need someone to take you home for Verl? Hell all I have to do is get in the saddle and tell
Pacer take me to the ranch or take me to the river and I only have to get started and I can go to
sleep and when I wake up it will be because we are there. We don’t have a horse to get us around
any more, we now have cars as I told you. Who rides them when you get drunk? That is the
problem we get in and start for home and run off the road or run into another guy going the other
direction and somebody gets hurt. Does every one get on the road at the same time? Why can’t
you just pull over and wait till you feel better then go on home? Can’t sleep along side of the road
that is against the law. Well then you deserve to run of the road, why don’t they change the law
so that a guy having a few to many can take a few minutes till he feels better then go on home? I
told you that is against the law you can’t park along side of the road and if you go to fast or to slow
they will get you for that also. How do you keep track of all these rules Verl? Makes my head
hurt just hearing about all this stuff and everyone is suppose to know all this? He had damn well
better or he will get introduced to the inside of the county or city jail in a hurry.
So it seems they don’t want you to drink so that’s out what about dances on Saturday night
if you don’t drink is it still OK to fight? No way you would go to jail for that real fast all so. Then
who would go to a dance except the girls? They don’t have many dances anymore and it has been
over thirty years sinse I saw a dance like you are talking about. They have dancing in some places
and they still have fun but they are mostly inside and those that go have someone who will take
them home so they don’t get into trouble and that is why not many can make a living doing this.
If the world has turned into such a bunch of lay me downs why would a person want to live like
that? How can you stand to be a part of that you just as well shoot yourself and get it over rather
than to spend your life worrying about being put in jail. Sounds to me like the thing to do is not
just talk to me Verl but figure out how to leave there and join me here. We could be twins except
we don’t look alike. So you had better go back and do some more figuring and get out of that time
area. Would still be fun to prove we are taking and that I can come back and forth and
communicate with you Sal. But talking with you makes me see what has been happening for years.
They have been taking away a little bit of freedom every year at such a slow pace that nobody pays
any attention to it just kind of accepts it. How that? When every you ask why they have to or
that stupid law the universal answer is, “don’t ask me I just work here”. In your world Sal if you
want to talk with the Judge you just go ask him in our world the only way you can see a judge is
to rob a bank. Don’t expect to talk and learn anything because everyone wants to charge you for
their time. Have heard where they want fifty dollars an hour just to see the chief of police in a lot
of our cities. No need to go any further with this discussion Sal it is just depressing for both of us
and this fall we have an election coming up and most are not voting for the Republican they are
voting against the President with the exception of those getting a free hand out and will vote to
keep it coming.
Why don’t you get on Pacer pack a few things and go on over to some mountain where we
can find where you are for sure and it shouldn’t be to hard if you can get next to a big river
especially. Well Verl I have several things that has to be done right here before I can go like for
one I have not been back to the ranch in a while and they will wonder what has happened to me.
You just have to give me a little time to get things done around here. Sal you don’t have a lot of
time you are like a clock the hours just keep ticking by and I can’t do a thing to help you. Damn
Verl can’t you bring me some good information is everything you talk about this negative? No
Sal I could talk about angles would that help? Sorry I ask Verl talk to you later. Bye Sal.

 

Chapter Twenty-One
Some how Pacer the more I talk to Verl the more I think they must slice a few brains out
each time they recycle us. If you consider how smart I am then talk to him it makes me wonder if
they know enough to go upstream above the heard for water. Every thing he has told me is like
they are a bunch of idiots. Who in their right mind would complain if someone burnt my house
down if I shot em? Don’t make any sense and if they said any thing after killing someone in my
family I would shoot the guy who said anything. Lets get things going and get back to the ranch
before the boss man thinks I have ran off with a widow or something.
Well come on in Sal you are just in time for supper but go on out to the back and wash up
and be sure and shake that dust off you know how the misses hates all that dirt. Joining the table
Sal sees a full table of hands having dinner and is greeted by most. Jerry who has been riding the
fence reaping and fixing for days looks up and says Sal you old dog you how can anyone keep
getting so ugly and still live? Well Jerry the facts are I have not gotten ugly it is your eye sight
that is failing have the rest of you noticed how he can ride right on past a broken post and never
see it? No wonder he thinks I am getting ugly, Hell Jerry down in town they have been getting
together and want to name a day after me some has suggest Sal for sisters of the valley but I have
been trying to avoid that much popularity if I can. Sal you are so full of it that the dog ran around
the house to hide when he saw you coming. What has been taking all of your time Sal we have
been out to the cabin several times and we can’t even see where you have chopped wood let a lone
cooked anything. Well I have been in a real mental puzzle here lately and I would like to ask all
of you for your input as to how you would handle it. Fire away Sal if if is big enough to hold your
attention the rest of us will think it is easy as roping a lamb.
If you guys were to hide something that you wanted to stay there for a hundred and fifty
years where would you put it? Just a minute there old feller what would you want to hid? Another
yells what would you have worth hiding? Another is laughing and talking to another worker what
could cause a guy to want to hide something like that? Quit all of you, can’t get any thing done
with everyone talking at the same time. There dose not have to be anything to hide and there
hasn’t got to be a reason what I want it an answer not a bunch of chickens scratching at the wire.
It is a simple question one that has got an answer and you guys are not trying to solve the problem
just ask more questions. Has anyone got any idea how you could put a rock in a spot that could
be there for over a hundred years? Ya I have Sal run down to the grave yard and dig a hole and
put up a marker here lies my rock don’t touch. No Billy a better way would be to put up a marker
saying old lady rocker rode her last. How about a marker saying, “Stupid Sal Smith put old rock
head under here in 1860”
Any other bright ideas? Ya! Go find a cave and then cave it off after putting in what ever
you want. Not any caves around here is there? Not right here but over by the Colorado River
there are some Jim Dandies. Saw one over there one time had two hundred Indians in it and they
keep their ponies in the back. Ya Jack says and I saw two wagons and four hay stacks behind
them. Ya Jerry says and they had a stack of lumber pilled up higher than than a house just waiting
to build the barn too. Now you guys mention it I saw that cave and the whole Indian Nation could
spend the rest of their lives in that and never see the same painting twice, that the place you talking
about? Don’t get into a pissen contest with Sal you will lose every time, old saying never try to
beat the cheater at his own game. Got any other suggestions while we have all these dollar a year
men here to help us? Out California way they say those Red wood trees grow for five hundred
years, go out there and wrap a rock in a sock and put it on top of a seed then in a few hundred years
the rock will be hanging from a sock like a Christmas ornament. In fact I would paint the sock
real pretty so that when they find it they can un-wrap it just like a present. If you hadn’t a shot the
Sheriff you could have ask him to put it in the back cell. He said that was so solid it would be
there when Hell froze over. That’s what Dib said about the bunk house and it never made it till
till spring. How about you just go outside and throw it down the well? Ain’t nobody going to go
down there for a rock and in a hundred years it may be dry and worthless anyway. Don’t tie the
rope on it though we may have to get water to do the dishes with. Hey stupid the rope wouldn’t
last a hundred years. It sure is nice to have you stop in Sal we don’t get this kind of arguing very
often and it dose make one contemplate on something better than just looking at each other. What
would make you think of something like this anyway Sal what is the point? Just wondering if I
could maybe find a way to leave stuff so the future people would have something kind of like the
Indians wrote on the walls to let us know they were here. You have a deep mind for a guy who
can’t even write his name Sal. Say Jim have you saw any caves with in a hundred miles of here?
No but that don’t mean they are not out here I would be there are a few but you would have to
know where to look. Say Sal that makes me think have you ever been out to old Mad Badger’s
house you know that old Indian that has a dug out against the North Bank of the slow slew? Yes
I have been out there but not in a long time he is about half crazy when he gets up on the wrong
side of the bed in the morning. He is that and then some was out there one day and he was shooting
his bow at a stuffed rabbit and I will say one thing for him at what ever age he is and it must be
over eighty he can shoot that bow like he was twenty years old. He put four arrows in that little
rabbit faster than I could have with a riffle. If you go out there don’t try to sneak up on him just
ride up like you was head of the mountain man mission and don’t pussy foot around or you will
be sleeping in boot hill come morning. What is boot hill? You haven’t heard yet? Well I’ll be
damned I know something before you; which is a first. We have a new cemetery down on a little
rise out of town and it is said to be placed there for all to see and they want those that cause
problems to see it and know they can take up occupancy real easy and the ranchers will pay the
rent. I’ve got to go Jim but if you hear of a better way to hide something come and find me will
you? Sure will Sal and be real glad to help if it mean that much to you. OK Jim I will see you in
the spring if we make it through the mattress. Right on Sal don’t take any phony money.

 

Chapter Twenty-Two
Come on Pacer lets show em some dust. Can you believe all those guys were not any
smarter than we were when trying to find a place to hide something. Look up there Pacer here
comes an old man riding a mule can’t be he has much light left in his hide the way he is riding.
Woa up here Pacer lets see what we have here. Hello old feller what brings you out this time of
night? Well young man lets just say I had a notion to come by and see you and this is how I figured
on doing it. Seeing me? How can that be and how did you know I would be coming down this
road at this time? Well young man in answer to your question you have been gave the rise to
several debates as to how a particular individual has been visiting with you. What are you talking
about old man has your imagination taken away all common sense? My good man are you going
to suggest that you have not been receiving visits from a certain individual from a different time
zone? How could you possibly know anything about that I have never said a word to anyone and
I am sure my friend has not contact anyone else around here. This is way beyond any thing I can
understand my dear old man first I get this visitor and now I get you and I did not ask for either
one of you. Lets get off of the road and over in a little more comfortable place to caring on this
conversation. Do you think you have enough strength to get that old mule and you over a mile
away? It would not do for you to be to critical in this situation we could be there before you could
entertain the thought. Maybe I should warn you this horse called Pacer is way beyond what you
can imagine the reason he is named Pacer is because he is the one who sets the pace. Well Brother
Salmon Smith I am about to educate you in the ways of the world and teach you to suck eggs at
the same time. Brother is it? Well maybe you should be taught a lesson even at your age their is
time for a lesson in the ways of the world. What do I call you old man? Well most call me brother
John however if it would make it easier for you it will be all right if you just call me Sir. Well
Brother John Sir do you know that just over this hill and down in the bottom is a small stream that
rambles down through a little meadow with a few scattered trees and small brush is? Most
certainly Brother Salmon I have spent many a day watching the clouds drift by and dreaming of
wonderful foods, great conversations and jovial fellows to enjoy them with me. If you are ready
then Sir we shall compete on three we will go, one, two , three. Lets go Pacer and with a lunge of
the greatest of strength he did just that and if Sal was not hanging on he would have been thrown.
Pacer took to the race like he was born to run and it was just as he went over the top of the hill that
he had a chance to look back to see how the old man was doing. He could not even see him and
for fear he had fell and maybe gotten hurt Sal turned Pacer to a angle that allowed him to see back
down through the low brush and vegetation. No John in sight so bringing Pacer to a full stop he
turned around to take a better look and could not see the old many anywhere. Damn he couldn’t
have gotten that lost could he Pacer? Maybe we should go over the top and take a quick look down
and if we don’t see him which I am sure we won’t we had better turn around and go back and see
if we can find him I would feel really bad if my play full way was to bring harm to such a nice old
man. Turning and looking down into the valley which was over a half mile away he could just
make out a dark spot in the bottom which could not possibly be John but just to make sure we had
better ride down and make sure. As Sal drew near the bottom he could see it was indeed a human
down there and the closer he got the more he realized he was looking at the old man and mule and
to top it off the old man was leaning over a small fire. This is impossible this can’t be, no way in
the world he could beat me down here let alone start a fire and the closer he got he could see the
coffee pot on the coals and coals? Now this is beyond stupid there is now way in this world he
could have gotten here before me let alone so much faster he had time to build a fire cook the
coffee and the wood had been burning for so long there were coals in the fire pit.
Climbing down off and dusting his hat Sal walked up to John and ask him how in the would
could he possible have known we were to come here and start a fire then meet him on the road talk
him into a race and come to this exact spot and be waiting. This is not making any sense at all to
me. Would you please explain this to me brother Sir? Well Sal may I call you Sal? Call me pot
licking Lou for all I care just explain to me how you did all this there is no way in the world you
could have beat me that far. Well Sal it can be explained all right so if you will sit down I will
begin by telling you that when you say no way in the world that is a mouth full and is how I did it.
You mean to tell me you are not from this world? Now I didn’t say that I just meant that not in
this world but it may be possible to use forces that are not from this world and you know nothing
about them so you are correct in part but it is not a complete and accurate way to describe what
just happened.
Damn you and Verl both for what you have done to my world I was just enjoying my self
and bothering no one and along comes Verl and said what I am going to tell you will change your
life forever now along comes John and well what have you got to say for your self? It just turns
out that because of Verl’s visits that I have wanted to talk with you and ask a few questions. Before
we start though I just imagine that you have several questions that you would like to find the
answers to. Go ahead and ask the first one you can think of. Real easy where the hell are you
from? Well I was living in seventeen hundred and seventy nine and counting then something
happened which changed things a little. This is stupid if ever it was first I have a visit from the
future now I get one from the past how am I to keep all my marbles from raddling together like a
pebble in a pickle barrel if this keeps up. Well Sal are you just going to set there and complain are
do you have a question that I could help answer for you? Yes John if you were going to hide
something where would you hide it so it would be here in a hundred and fifty years? I would go
down to a church preferable to a Catholic Mission that has been built around here and go out into
the yard and dig down about six feet and burry it. Why a Mission? Well Sal they save those big
time because of the history and all involved with them. Most was built with slave labor but they
don’t let that information out any more than they have to but it matters not the information is what
you needed to know. Now what else can I do to satisfy you as to my honesty and to the truth of
what I am saying? Well Brother John because of the fact that you just happen to beat me in a ten
minute race by four hours you kind of took the sand out of my shoes. Now I guess the next thing
I would like to know is what can I do for you now you have taken this two hundred year long trip
just to race me? Sal this may be a surprise to you but I am not here for me I am here for you. What
could I possibly want from the past? Knowledge my dear friend knowledge. Nothing upon this
world is more important than knowledge. Money is limited to time, health is always failing but
knowledge goes on and on.
I do believe I should set down here and just absorb the pull that I seem to be having between
us. I do believe you are learning Sal this is incredible but somehow you are brighter than you look.
Ya John I am just like the June bug that swallowed a fire fly things just seem to be getting brighter.
Sal those that are open to knowledge will learn those that close out a thought or a way of thinking
are limited to what they already knew. You have to be open to new information rather you
understand it or not. For instance Sal I know that you will leave this earth as Sal and return as
Verl that is a given and you have already accepted that very few in my time could have wrapped
their minds around this subject how ever you have been open and have been learning way beyond
what would be expected of you. John to accept this is kind of like having an Indian drive an arrow
though you it just seems like it is easy to get the point when it is driven in fast enough. You have
an unusual way of describing things Sal but if you can get past the first part of it not being possible
and accept it as it is true then pass on to under standing it and then on to accepting it you have
passed many a scholar that couldn’t even accept the possibility.
I am just so great full and knowledgeable to all this that I have about came to the conclusion
that I must be a real magnet to all the whackoes in the world. If I could write a song it could be
on the order of I left my mind in the past so I could have a memory of the future. One thing I am
sure of when I die I am going to be sure they wipe my mind as clean as possible so there is no
memory of any of this. I just suppose that you had a hand in the Declaration of Independence?
Sal I have got to tell you I have had a hand in that and a whole bunch more I have worked over the
shoulder of some of the greatest minds in all history. John did they talk with you or did you just
stand back and kind of let those ideas get planted into their heads. No Sal I talked with all of them
but they knew that if they told they were getting information from another source nobody would
have believed them and what they did would not have been as important as it is now. So what you
are telling me is you kind of like helped Benjamin Franklin when he was working on all his ideas?
Of course Sal he was not that shape but he was willing to learn and that is what made him so
important. Wow John you are loading me up with stuff that is incredible and really great to know
but what I can do with this information is beyond me at this time. Just a minute here Sal you have
been getting information about what is coming in the future from Verl have you been listening?
How can I not listen? He is like you he gets your attention and he hooks on like a alligator in the
dessert he may never get another chance like this one. So what you are telling me is you are going
to help Verl or me? Sal there is no difference as you know so we both know that much and I
believe you have accepted it so we can move on from here. Where we will be going is pretty much
a given if we are to have any positive input toward changing the future generations. So what you
are telling me is while I am talking with Verl you are going to be riding my shirt tails and helping
me? That is about as accrete as I could put it. Well I will be thinking this one over and if you find
me wondering off through the hills babbling like a baby try to remember to help this poor old
cowboy. Right on Sal just try to keep a eye on the trail ahead and don’t give up. Right on John
we will certainly be remembered by some. Adios John. So long Sal.

 

Chapter Twenty-Three
I think it’s time we took a few days and just went off by ourselves Pacer and do a little
thinking. I am beginning to think that every thing that has to do with this world is turned upside
down and is trying to be ran through me. This time John did not say he was me or that he was
related to me but how did he know about Sal? Can’t remember what his answer was to that
question but you can bet it was a doze. Lets head out to the corral on whisper point and see if the
spring is still running up there this year. Dry’s up in the late summer but may still be going and
that would be a great place to relax and think things over..OPs we better go by the ranch and get
us a little grub and pick up a few things good thing we are on good terms with the cook these days
or we would be in real trouble.
He sure was an obliging old cuss and to have gave us both bear sign and apple pie both is
beyond me but don’t look a gift horse in the mouth is what they say and he certainly is a gift horse.
I did tell him where we would be and invited him to join us if things are such around the place that
he can get away. Of course a cook never gets a day off and if he gets out of the house it is only to
go to the privy. Even I wouldn’t be able to get out this often if I were not allowed to hunt for the
strays that are forever wondering off into the back country. I better make it a point to bring in a
few on this trip or I will be fixing fence the rest of the month.
Look there she is flowing like a real prize today we have really lucked out. We can burn
those cow pies and do just fine for kindling so we won’t have to go hunting for wood. Oh look
here they have left a pile of wood for the branding which is not till next spring but I remember
now of the boss telling several to gather wood and get it out here as he was hopping to catch a few
mavericks and would want to brand em when he dose.
Now this is more like it Pacer and I don’t want you to be running off and leaving me all
alone with nobody to talk to but I will take the saddle and bridle off where you can roll in the dirt
and get a drink of water on your own and its OK to enjoy yourself. Now again I have made a meal
beyond anything old Frank Walter could dish out. Can’t remember her name but sure is something
to look at real easy on the eyes if I do say so myself. We timed this just about right as we usually
do supper over with and a hot cup of coffee to go with the apple pie. Can’t get much better than
this even if I say so myself. Come to think of it Pacer we haven’t had any visitors from those camp
down on the big creek but then I wouldn’t expect to with all these buffalo hunters out and around.
Don’t have to worry about the Indians they are gentle compared to those damn hunters got to keep
an eye on them.
From afar Sal heard a, “hello the camp”. Better tie this gun to your belly Pacer then if I
need it you just side right on up here and I will hide another under the grub sack, put the rifle by
the wood stack. Come on in if you are friendly if not come on anyway been looking for something
to practice my trick shooting anyway. As the two riders came near Sal could see another one
holding back so they wanted to make it look like there was only two of them well they have already
tipped their hands and now we shall see how good they are. What can I do for you guys? We saw
the fire and thought you would like some company to take the edge off any loneliness you may
have. Well gentle men I have felt lonely sense leaving my mothers tit years ago but don’t bother
getting down off that horse if you want to see the sun come up in the morning. Why you being so
unfriendly to a couple of strangers? Don’t know what your name is but when two ride up to the
fire and leave a coyote out in the brush I get kind of nervous and when I do old Pacer here just
naturally takes sides with me. Watch him as he paces back and forth he knows something is wrong
the same as I do. Now you guys may have found a few green horns down your back trail but you
came to the wrong fire tonight so I will just say good night and expect you to get along with your
searching for another easy prey this old coon don’t take to being hunted. As Sal was talking Pacer
was stomping and moving over closer to the visitors horses. One of the men said, “what is with
this fool of a horse he just keeps sliding up here closer as we talk”? Well fellows you have got a
lot to learn about this camp fire tonight. From your side it looks like a guy out here all alone but
from my side looking the other way you start something and between Pacer and myself you will
be pushing daisies and those out in the brush will be hunted by my partner here and not a horse in
a hundred miles can out run him let alone he is empty backed and your friends out there are added
burden to the race. What makes you think their is somebody out there? Just because you are
stupid don’t mean that everyone else is stupid. It is only fair to warn you that between the two of
us we could nail your hide to the barn before you could lick your lips. Now Pacer and that was all
the warning gave. Pacer kicked the the horse in the side so fast the rider didn’t have time to get
set and as he did Sal pulled the pistol out from under the sack and shot the lead rider out of the
saddle. After kicking the horse Pacer turned and ran into the dark and with out a doubt Sal knew
he was heading to the other horses out in the dark. The fellow who had hit the ground started to
raise and looked into the point of a pistol. You sure you want to do that? Sal says. Mister you
sure don’t give a guy a chance to be friendly do you. If that is what you call friendly you had
better go back to school. Where I came from those are fighting words and they can get killed.
Damn look what you did to my partner. Better him than me and if you left more than one out there
you better be saying a prayer for them now because Pacer gets real mean when he wants to. What
the hell kind of horse have you gotten I have never heard of one attacking like that. We spend a
lot of time out here alone and with nothing else to do I have trained him to respond to several
commands and it has saved my bacon several times, now you just drop that gun belt and gather up
your worthless crook here and it will be up to you to provide him with a place to rest tonight. You
wouldn’t happen to be the ones that caused all the shooting down in the village last week would
you? No we just arrived been riding for over a week with out stopping. Well this should give you
reason to keep right on riding and as he was taking Pacer came up out of the dark and stood beside
the guy on the ground. Get that dam horse away from me before he kills me. Get your lazy ass in
gear and don’t try anything and there is a fifty fifty chance he will not bother you. Just roll that
one over and undo his belt gun and let it lay right where it falls and if you want to join him in the
here after just reach for it. Gathering up the one on the ground after undoing the belt he raised him
up and putt him belly down over the guys horse he took the reins and started out in to the dark. I
will not even bother to wait for my horse I am out of here and if I ever see you again I will come
shooting. Be a good idea friend because I will not bother with the lose talk but will just lay to the
leather. Can I have my gun back now? Hell no let that be the price of the education every one
has to pay to learn and your partner paid a heavy price and between the two guns I will say a few
words on your behalf the next time I run into a preacher.
Looks to me like we will finally get a little rest and relaxation here Pacer and we damn
well earned it, come on up here and let me give you a few sugar cubes to show my appreciation
for a job well done. Sure strange to me that so many guys can ride horse and never learn to talk to
it and have not gotten an idea that you can be trained just as well as a dog can. We have talked for
so long that I know you are listing better than several friends do when they are here.
Now back to the pie, damn the coffee is cold well I will move the pot over just a little and
add more wood. Hello the camp fire. Damn luck anyway Pacer what is it with us that we just
continue to draw dudes like fly’s to a horse turd? “Is that you Sal? Ya that is not the statue of the
great one, just plain old me setting here and waiting for company. Sal you sure get around a lot
everywhere I go you are either there or just left. Well Johnny Jones everyone has to be somewhere
sometime and I chose to be here about right now, what is your excuse for avoiding the offering of
society these days? Just stopped in for a cup of coffee but who were those two guys out there and
one of em was leading a horse with a dead man over the saddle. Did you kill another guy today?
Yes he was in a hurry to get on so I sent him packing. Don’t want to know how many you sent
packing this year alone but I know you have been busy. Can’t imagine why they would want to
make you sheriff unless they just like to watch the fun. You think I am bad how many do you
think they have put in that new cemetery this summer? Can’t count that high but they put the first
dozen out side the fence because they figured it would be full before Christmas and the wanted to
save room for the real sinners. Say Johnny do you know why they call that Boot Hill? No why?
Because most of those going there died with their boots on and that little place is kind of up on the
hill so they just naturally named it Boot Hill. Have been doing all I can to fill er up. I have been
told there are worse towns in the country but when I ask to name one nobody can think of any that
are this bad. Meet a guy over from Dead Wood and he said they have about ten deaths a month
and we do that weekly. They are really cleaning up this area big time just last week a guy spit on
the side walk so a feller he up and shot him.
Just as well stay the night can’t do much better than here Johnny. Ya think I will settle in
for the night do you expect any trouble from the Indians around here? No we don’t get to much
trouble with all the Buffalo hunters out and around. Sal I think I will lay my saddle right here by
the fire if you don’t mind. Have at er Johnny if we have more company you will be right here to
welcome them I will be back in the brush just a little ways and I will cover you from there. Man
Sal you never appeared to me to be such a scared E cat before what is going on? Well Johnny
when you watch as many go down from stupid things you get to where you are a lot more careful.
Like I say I don’t expect any problems so just rest easy and if you wake up in hell I will say a few
words for you. What a pal you turned out to be Sal, good night.

 

Chapter Twenty-Four
With breakfast over with and the camp fire put out all signs of a camp were removed and
just before climbing a board the horses Johnny turns to Sal and ask. Sal when those guys came at
you last night were you scared? Every one is a little bit scared regardless of what the odds are or
how good you are, that is just natural. Sal I have never had to face anything like that before how
did you know there was somebody else out side of the fire light. I saw him just as he turned away
from the other two and besides that when the two rode up Pacer moved to the other side from them
and was watching out the direction of the third guy which told me there were more than two but I
didn’t know how many more but when Pacer moved toward the brush on the left I knew where
they were and Pacer stayed between me and them until I told him to kick that horse. You actually
trained Pacer to kick a horse? Yes I did and he will kick a man if I tell him to. What do you say
to get him to do it? Well now that is between me and him I don’t want you are anyone else to
know just in case something should happen between us. You are really one to float the river with
not going to say a word that could cost you later. Well how did you know that you would be able
to get the gun out before one of those guys did? That one is real easy most of these crooks want
to tell you what a bad ass they are and I don’t care what you think so I just start the ball rolling
when I can see what is coming. I like to be the first to know when the fight is going to start ten
times out of ten I will be the first to move. Gives me the edge that keeps me alive and if you are
smart you will learn from it and another thing never drink to much when you are in town or where
others can take advantage of it. Thanks Sal and I will most likely see you back at the ranch for
supper. You will be there won’t you? If not tonight I will be there eventually but right now I have
a lead on several boys who I suspect are stealing cows. So I may not make it in tonight but will
be there so long Johnny. Waving with his hat and putting it on he rode off up over the hill and
disappeared.
Watching him go out of sight he turned to put his foot in the stirrup and Pacer started to
side step. What are you doing trying to break my leg, damn you… Oh damn again I wasn’t paying
attention like I should have been. Verl you are going to get me into trouble one of these days. By
now you should know when I am here and not be so jumpy. Say what is it that I seem to sense
today did you do a little killing lately? Ya I did a little bit of garbage removal last night. There is
something else in the back of your mind that I seem to be hearing. Who is this John that is in the
your head? Lets talk about that a minute shall we. Ya Verl I would like to know about this John
my self did you send him to me? No I didn’t have anything to do with it and have never talked
with him myself but it seems kind of strange did you mean he knew all about me and the fact we
were talking? Yes he knew you were me and he also told me he was from the past but he didn’t
try to say he was me or anything else he just said he was from the past and he had worked with
some of the greatest minds in the United States. He talked like he had gave information to some
of those who wrote the Constitution and he didn’t make it sound like a brag it was kind of like he
was just stating a fact. You know Sal that is kind of like how I got the information to be here it
just kind of appeared in my head and where it came from I don’t know but I acted on it. Maybe
that is how those smart guys did all that stuff when they had not even had much of an education.
Most had learned from their parents who didn’t have all that much education and then they did a
lot of reading and learned on their own. Of course there were many of them that got together and
from what history has told they got into some arguments like no one would believe but when they
finally got done they had came to some kind of an agreement and it has lasted almost two hundred
years. I think the biggest difference Sal from then and today those that are making the decisions
have nothing to balance the decision on. They have been raised with the idea that to make money
even if you have to cheat someone out of something is the way it is to be. We are not allowed to
really stand up for our selves anymore we have to allow some dude who is a sissy anyway to tell
the judge that we are a real nice guy. and would not hurt anyone on purpose. It is so phony today
that you would be in jail till for teaching Pacer to kick another horse and if it did kick another horse
he would be shot as a minis to others and you would be put in jail of animal cruelty. We can not
allow anyone in our world to be able to think for them selves it is highly un-called for and is not
to be allowed. So this John also figured out that we could leave a message in a church yard which
is very smart in a way because we can get to it later and there is a good chance that it will be saved
for a long time. Have you got a mission in your area Sal? Not to my knowledge but we do have
some church schools and some other church buildings but I would have to go find out what they
are for the last time I was in church I think Jesus was just picking out his cross. Well you try and
find out what you can and I will be back I have a few things to attend to myself and so I will bid
you a good day and I will be gone. Don’t let the cloud get up your nose on the way through. Very
funny Sal…

 

Chapter Twenty-Five
Good morning Verl good to have you back into the real world. Anna the fact that I am in
deep concentration does not mean it is not the real world. I understand what you are saying
however when you are in those deep trances I don’t like to disturb you it is like you are not even
here. You do make a few movements with your eye balls but other than that you would not know
you were alive. I usually tell my self that if something should come along like my nose itching or
what ever, that it I can scratch or answer the phone or whatever is necessary and then go right back
to where I was. If something should happen while I am in this state don’t worry about waking me
it is not a problem however if it is just to take out the garbage I would prefer not to be bothered. I
am dying to find out what you have learned about Sal lately? Well this is what has happened since
we have had a chance to talk and Verl began to bring Anna up to date and was especially wanting
her to know about John and his helping write those important papers and the fact that he implied
that Sal would have a helping hand it the future of America.
Anna I have thought it over and think I have a way of describing what is happening here
in the country. Lets assume for a minute that a great big lake was found down in the high dessert
and nobody was fishing it. The state would come in and see there were no boat docks or anyway
to launch a boat so they would spend millions putting out markers to slow down the boats and
would have docks going way out in the water and concrete boat launching ramps, parking for the
cars, pickups and trailers for the fisher men. Then one party of our government would be sending
guys to school to study every aspect of the lake and they would get water from another lake to
lower the temperature of the water to a level they thought would be perfect for the fish. They
would raise taxes to pay for the study of the lake and to pay the boats they would put on the lake
and the government employees to oversee the lake then they would repair the permits and personal
to oversee the permits and all these would have to be guaranteed; a hospital plan, a dental plan,
vacation and retirements. Brochures would be created to see to the advertisements and why
vacationers should come to the lake with all the rest rooms, picnic areas, new trees and life guards
to insure the safety. The news media would be out to insure everyone knew that those in this very
democratic environment could rest reassured that all there tax money is spent in the most useful
manor.
Now the next party would come in and say that nobody was fishing because of all the
useless spending and the cost of maintaining the lake was so expensive they couldn’t afford to fish
there and they would be spending money on all kinds of programs trying to cut the entitlements to
a minimum so the cost would not be so high. They would lobby to cut spending on everything
and try to get those working at the lake to work less days and cut the vacation pay. The fights
would be on between the two parties and when it got so bad that every form of government was
pointing a finger at those who was directing the operation of either party was bad mouthing and
just plane ripping each other to pieces would they finally decide private enterprise should get the
government out of the way. The first private contractor would go down to the lake and when a kid
came by on a bike he would pull him over and ask why nobody was fishing this lake. The young
boy would look up and with a big smile tell him the reason no one fished the lake was because
there had not been any fish in this lake in years. And that my dear Anna is the very thing wrong
with our country we have all these specialist out there studying how to make the our world a better
place and with the two parties we have in Washington they have been so involved in beating out
the other they have forgotten to talk to the natives. It is so important that the Democrats or the
Republicans are correct that even the news media are favoring one side and not paying any
attention to what we want. Look at the health care, look at the E.P.A., look at the forest service
they have taken thousands and thousands of acres of trees and made damn sure private enterprise
don’t spoil our environment and now the forest is being eat up by bugs and forest fires but don’t
you dare to make profit out of it. Remember the spotted owl? Well the forest service did one hell
of a great job now the spotted owl can set on a steel flag pole. Think anything will be done? First
thing is send all those with pockets and heads so full of them selves into a room all by them selves
and see if they can figure out how to get water out of the creek with a bucket. Bet fifty dollars
they could never decide who would pack the bucket who got to drink first and where to set the
bucket.
We have gotten to the point that the fight is rather to be democratic or republican and to
hell with anything else. The congress is so full of one side or the other they can’t see the lake has
no fish all they see is how they should do things. Maybe John is trying to help Sal and in effect
help me to make sure of where we should be heading.
Years ago they opened up the Oklahoma Territory for settlement what do you think the
chances are of that happening today? The government has thousands and thousand of acres of
property and we spend our whole life working just to get a small lot in the ghettoes of a town while
they take our earnings to make sure we stay there and obey their every wish. If we could keep
what we earn we would not need the hand outs from the government. Anna look at the bridges in
California they stop every car and charge to cross the bridge and the guy driving the car paid for
the bridge with his taxes and now the guy who charges for the bridge makes a living by charging
you to cross a bridge you paid for. This is going on in every aspect of our lives and we allow it to
continue. If I had not stepped back into the past and could talk with Sal I would never have saw
the stupidity of this situation. We are not going forward as a nation we are going back. We the
people was doing great till the government got emptying our wallets faster than we could fill them.
Would you please explain to me how we can be trillions of dollars in debt and nobody with a job?
Except those employed by the government and they are not adding to the economy they are
collecting wages from the tax payer who is out of work because the government man is doing it.
Understand this the tax payer pays the government worker and the tax payer is out of work where
do you think the money comes from to pay this guy. The government borrows it and the tax payer
can pay it back when he goes back to work.
Anna I can’t see why I would want to get involved with this thing. There is absolutely now
way in the world this can go on forever, only the news media can paint a different picture and
make everyone believe it is going to get better. Anna we are heading over a cliff and those on
board are enjoying the ride and say well when we go down we all go down. It only took twenty
five thousand dollars of scholarship money four years of schooling to convince our selves that we
should be happy when it happens.
Verl will you please get off this subject I know you are right but I don’t want to talk about
it all the time; it is on television, radio and in the papers and it is so depressing I don’t want to hear
it anymore. All right Anna I will do just like the rest and maybe you can see why I don’t want to
know about John and his writings to reality. Maybe the only reason I am able to step back in time
and talk with Sal is as it appears on the surface I am just doing it for the fun of it and rather I prove
it or not is immaterial. I was starting to think that maybe I had been given a special gift for a
reason but I will try and forget that and just look at the natural and obvious reason.

Chapter Twenty-Six
Sal I have to talk to you and didn’t take time to see where you are and what you are doing.
Well Verl I am in a real deep discussion with Pacer and hate to be disturbed but for you I guess it
will be all right what have you got on your mind? First I was wondering if you found where an
old house was to burry something. I told you I would don’t you remember anything? Not that the
last I remember was you were going to check and to be honest I can’t remember what happened
after that. I can see that time has not added anything to the memory so I will tell you what I found.
Nothing there are a few buildings made of rock but not built to last and I can’t find one over ten
feet high around here. Down on Big Creek along the Hill Trail there is some of the larger places
and up on the Saline River there are a few homes that try to use the water from the river but they
have wells and none of them are big enough or stout enough to last very long with out constant
care. Got a couple of buildings used for church’s but nothing to get excited about. Let me explain
to you a little bit about this area the ranch we work out of built the buildings while trying to hold
off the Indians and we not put together for beauty but to serve a purpose like get out of the never
ending wind and cold, hold off Indians and have a place to eat in and for those that could a place
to lay on a soft bed. Not many spent much time building something more than what could be put
up in a hurry figuring that someday they would add on or improve so maybe if you came back here
in ten years or so you would see what you are talking about. I have saw buildings like I am sure
you are meaning but not now we are lucky to have those big wood buildings that they store buffalo
hides in and meat buildings are big and a few for horses and storing stuff. Better find another way
like we should go somewhere else to do this but I have been thinking about it and you said I am
going to walk into a cabin out on the prairie and set down and die and now you want me to travel
out on the prairie? Seems like a death wish to me. How far out have you rode Sal looking for
something? How far do you want me to ride I usually travel with in a thirty mile radius but not
very comfortable in the outer area of that because of Indians. Little problem here Verl when you
ride out like that if you ride on a ridge they can see you for miles and if you are down in the bottoms
you can ride right up to them. Take your pick but up on the ridge there is nothing saying you will
see them before they see you and in which case they keep low and work around in front of you
and next thing you know you are in a horse race and better not take second or third. So which do
you do when you travel Sal? I ride with my head just about the top of the hill but you can’t go
from hill to hill and stay even your up and down and can get your tail caught in a pinch any old
time. If I am going to travel I am going to put all the miles I can and head for the next ranch town
or what ever and the way we do it is try to find a bar have a beer and can learn a lot about the
territory ahead. Where it is dangerous and where to avoid. Right now the bar down at the village
is as dangerous as any in the country they have one or two shooting a night and if they don’t have
that it will be knife fight and if lucky only a fist fight and few of them stay with only fists.
Tell you what Verl let me have a few days and I will tell the boys I am about to move on
to greener pastures. Haven’t spent more than three or four months in a place in a long time so it
will not be a surprise to them and if I am going to leave I want to be out of here before it gets to
cold I hate to travel in cold and hate to bed down in the snow. You don’t have any family around
there anyway do you Sal? No haven’t been around any for two or three years so that has no holds
on me. I will be on the road in a week if I can just hold your horses. I can hold my horses but it
would help if I knew what day or even what year it is. Do you know for sure if Lincoln is
President? Thought you said Johnson was president. No I said Johnson replaces Lincoln but got
to find the date sense you don’t even know who is President. Well the last I knew it was “Old
Doughface”, Buchanan but that was back a few summers and I don’t know anymore about it than
anyone else. How can you live in the United States and not even know who the President is?
Damn easy when every time the subject comes up someone is either killed or wounded. Why is
that Sal? Hell nobody can agree on what is happening like I think there is a fight going on here in
Kansas about the governor and if you were to go in and get a drink and raise the glass and say here
is the the Governor you had better be drinking with your left hand and have you gun hand ready
to move. Hell Verl what you have been saying about all those is not that much different than now
except when they are elected we know they are for America and not some other place. I am not a
bit surprised about the crooks they have just gotten better at stealing than they do now. Tell you
what Sal you can’t get close enough to a president today to hit em with a snow ball where in your
day you could walk up and shake hands I imagine. Yes you could get pretty close if you would
happen to be in the right spot at the right time but remember somebody that famous has plenty of
spectators following them around. Today they are so many that would do harm that they have to
keep them away. Have had Presidents shot and it is such a stupid killing because it really don’t
change things like those that do the killing think it would and you end up with a very bright guy
gone and he may have really helped in the long run. Solves nothing and creates a void where it
shouldn’t be so safety for those in office is very important today even if they them selves are
useless for the office they are holding.
We have not talked about it but you are figuring on going West right Sal? Yes I would
want to go east I have been out there but not as far as I wanted to so that is my next choice. Just
wanted to make sure because it would be a lot easier if you were next to a major river or high
mountain. Just relax and take it easy and I will be on the trail as soon as possible. So long Verl.

 

Chapter Twenty-Seven
This is a lonesome trail if there ever was one but with you to listen and me to talk we do
just fine. Can’t believe all the human skeletons we have saw sense we left “Old Chief Smoky
Rock”. Good thing I was told to pack plenty of water because there sure is none around her We
may have a few more days to go so we have to conserve what we can. I did leave a little something
for Verl under the chief to see if he would find it. That last place we stopped had to have had over
ten bodies left there didn’t bother to spend time counting or looking to close but they must have
had it pretty hard by the looks of that camp sight. I was told that it was about 350 miles or four to
five days travel from Hays to Denver so they should have had it better than this wonder what
happened they had it so tuff? The locals told me of many Indian problems in this area and perhaps
the spring in this area was not worth your life to get a drink. Perhaps that is why the human bones
was so plentiful they couldn’t get to the water.
OH hello Verl imagine meeting someone like you out here in the middle of no where. Was
working on another area of things and got a strong feeling you wanted me. Well I did leave a little
surprise for you under the chiefs head, it is called old chief smoky have you found it yet? Let me
tell you a little bit about where you are right now is the first time I had a damn good idea where
you are. That area you are in will later turn out to be Scott City but there is no city there at this
time is there? No Verl a few houses and several settlers along here and I stopped in and had a
drink but the bar was located in a tent and they had two wooden barrels with the tail gate of a
wagon across the barrels. Haven’t read anything about a bar there but the this is called the Kansas
Pyramids or Monument Rocks and they are located along the B.O.D. which is Butterfield Overland
Dispatch. Yes I know that the same way I found it was called Old Smoky they have a flat rock
out here with D.O.B. on it and along side is another one saying Old Smoky and it would do me
know good to look for your little prize because the thing feel down in 1968. You must be following
the Smoky Hill Trail right? Yes and I figure on going to Cherry Creek and see if I can find a few
nuggets worthy of my talents. Got any idea how long it will take you to get there? If I can keep
traveling at the rate we have been doing I should be there in just a few days. Have stopped a few
times to talk to a few and as I said the bar seemed to jump right up in front of me so I went in to
see it and another thing is I am not use to seeing skeletons along the way but this area has many
and I have not stopped to count them but someone must have had one hell of a time of it along
here. One thing of interest here is those traveling seem to know this is Kansas so you have to be
right. I’m pretty sure Sal where you are but have you found what date it is? Not for sure nobody
pays much attention to that haven’t passed anyone who cares. Went passed a young couple riding
in a one wheeled cart behind a mule yesterday and they told of seeing Indians leading a pack horse
loaded with stuff and figured someone had lost all their stuff and would be out here somewhere
wondering around trying to get it back. How is it you can make it and not get lost and those others
seem to lose their way? Real easy you look at the North Star at night and pick out something on
the horizon to watch during the day and when I pass what ever it is I find something else to lead
me. Hell Verl I spent the night with a guy and the next morning he got up and started back the
way he had just came from. I ask him if he were giving up and going back and he said no why?
Told him he just came from there and he thought I was dreaming so I had to show him his trail
from the day before and even then he couldn’t tell a shoe print from a mules. Makes one wonder
how they got this far with no more smarts than a road apple. Say is there anything else out this
way I should know about? Water? Streams or small towns along this route? Can tell you this in
April of 1860 there was an article about the Smokey Hill Trail and they said another name was the
Starvation trail and only a foolhardy and insane man would travel it. Sound like anyone you know?
Yes but he has not been born yet…Go chase a rabbit and let me be for awhile. Here I am the best
friend you have and you are trying to get rid of me. No the best friend is Pacer and he never gives
me any back talk and rarely makes fun of me. OK if that is the best you can do I will catch up
with you and tell of anything I learn about where you are heading but Denver is just a small town
right now so I doubt anything bigger will appear in front of you. They have outposts about every
four miles but I think the farthest is not much over 20 miles out by outposts they are speaking of
places to stay or get something to eat.. It’s a good thing for you that the government has not gotten
as big as it is today or we would still be chopping wood to prepare supper. Hold it Verl are you
saying you don’t have to chop wood anymore? Yea that is right Sal most normal is a microwave
and I can take a spud out of the cupboard and in eight minutes it is done. How is that? Well just
imagine your bread box and imagine a knob on the front of it, you open a door put in something
close the door and turn the knob and it will cook whatever you put into it. You can boil a cup of
water in less than two minutes. Something else we have is or cook stove is like yours only you
have a flat burner and use a hook to lift it out we don’t lift it out we have like a big coil and you
set something on it and turn the knob and the coil gets red hot and cooks whatever or we have one
that runs on gas and you have a bunch of flames around in a circle that you set the pot or what ever
on and this heats the pot. What a great deal that would be how can that be beat? Well you have
to work two days a month to pay for it. Damn Verl I work four hours a day just cutting wood
bringing it in and taking out the coals seems like a good deal to me. Ya except you have to work
two weeks a month just to pay the taxes on all this stuff that saves you from working. Why do
you have so much in taxes? We give part of it away to those that sneak into the country so they
have something to eat. Who gives a damn rather they get anything to eat? OH half of our society
is Democrat and they believe in dividing the wealth take away from those that have and give to
those that don’t. What is the other side and what do they say? The others are Republicans and
that name came from the Roman Republic and I think their main object is to keep us in fear and
confusion. It is ran by a small amount of people but in our case it is so big that we are continually
in this fear of them not taking care of us and confusion in how they can do it. Both have their
advantages but are far out bid by their ability to take from the people and waste it. Never in the
history of the world was a leader needed more than in the United States today. You go on with
your travels and I will go back to the drawing board and see if I can help this situation and will be
in touch with you. OK all mighty voice in the sky and if I get a chance I will sacrifice a virgin to
your memory. Ten to one if you found a virgin my memory would never enter your head and I
doubt she would be sacrificed other than to your youth and lust. So long and be careful.

 

Chapter Twenty-Eight
Anna I have a couple of questions and would like your input as to go about finding this
stuff when Sal gets to Colorado. Why do you think it will be any different in Colorado than it was
in Kansas? Well for one thing there are mountains and then there are mountains and Colorado has
mountains that have not changed much in a thousand years and if I can find a spot it should not be
any different today than it was back in 1860. Then what do you need my input for if you have
already made up your mind? Well you very often can really get to the meat of things and
sometimes you see things that I overlook and would appreciate you taking a few minutes and just
look at this and see if it looks good to you. I will think about it but Verl you told me that when
you had a problem and could not solve it you claimed to relax and go down into a deep sleep in
which you walked down this flight of stairs and when you got to the bottom you said you walked
into a room and there was this big table there and anyone in the history of the world that you
wanted there was there. Ya what a great idea I did tell you about that and yes I can ask that some
of the great minds of the world can be there but first I will have to find out who those great minds
are. Sure hope I don’t have to educate those guys..Climb off it Verl you could get a fifth grader
and have to slow him down so you would understand what he was saying. Very funny Anabelle,
very funny.
Steve Jobs is the first name that comes up and I admit he was one of the great minds of the
world but his was in a different form; that is his great thinking had to do in solving problems that
although they were like genius type his was not this type. But just to be on the safe side I think I
will request he be present.
Albert Einstein is way up there when you want to talk of great minds but I have had him in
the room several times and he may have been a real deep thinker but he can’t ever get his mind on
what I want it on he continues to talk about what he likes not what the subject is so this time I am
going to avoid him and find others.
Alexander Gram Bell has been in my room many of times and is a real gentleman and fun
to talk with but I think I will keep looking and make him a possible. Sir Isaac Newton was always
a great thinker and added many of times so I will keep him on the list.
Richard Feynman the physicist once said that the easiest person to fool is oneself he went
on to say that we should each look to what is right and what is wrong with our theories and this
may be exactly what he was talking about so I should be careful in not taking someone who could
very well be the one to solve my problem. It matters not how many I choose but I would like to
keep it small to get a real feel for the hole situation. Just thinking of how many times I have
brought Abe Lincoln into the room with us and he is a very good thinker however he is very
reluctant in giving out information.
Finally deciding who I want to meet with I am going to lay back now and relax and I remind
myself not to go to sleep but stay awake and breath deeply and continually stay tuned into the
subject at hand. I am going to go into a room and I will be meeting with Steve Jobs, Albert
Einstein, Alexander Graham Bell, Sir Isaac Newton, Kit Carson and Mother Teresa they will be
setting at a long table and willing, able and waiting to answer any questions that I should have.
First I must take three very deep breaths and relax now as I go down these stairs I see the
door before me, stepping up to the door which has the door knob on the right I push the door in
and to the right I see Mother Teresa first setting at the head of the table to the left and on the other
side is Steve Jobs, Albert Einstein and Alexander Bell with Kit Carson setting at the end of the
table on this Side of the table on the right turned towards me is Isaac Newton who I have never
saw a picture of but he is the only one in the room I had not talked with or at least saw a picture
of. Directly in front of me is a stool tall enough I can set on and my legs just touch the floor I walk
into the room and stepping over the stool set down facing those at the table.
First I would like to thank all those in attendance today and especially Mother Teresa who
has been ask to attend for several reasons first Mother let me say your presence is intended to keep
the subject and the discussion in a manor that is keeping with our religious beliefs any input you
can offer shall be especially important to us. Let me explain the situation here and the reason I
have ask you to attend this meeting. I have discovered that by self hypnosis I can not only step
back in time I can communicate with myself in a previous life because you are at this table this is
not very hard for you to accept but keep in mind that those friends and others around me can not
understand how this can be possible. Each of you have under gone a similar situation or you would
not be in this room for the obvious reason I don’t know how to bring the living with me but the
dead are always available as you know. Continuing on I have talked a number of times with myself
from another period of time and would like to prove this is possible.
Yes Mother you have something to add? Yes Verl have you considered if this is with Gods
teachings? And do you think he would allow this to happen? First Mother I have put my findings
before God himself and have in fact know with out a doubt that he is aware and accepts what I am
doing and I know this has been heard by his ears. That was one of my very first concerns and
another reason I have ask that you attend this meeting.
You have a question Kit? Yes I would like to know what is different than what the Indians
have done for hundreds of years. Have they talked with those before them? Verl it is common
thing with the Indians of several nations to fast for several days and one way or another they talk
with the sprits of the past. Many ceremonies are to deal with this subject and I personally have
talked with several many braves who would never question another for the vary thing you are
talking about. Kit that is the very reason that I have invited you to be at this table and would like
you to know how important what you are saying is to me. I am faced with a different culture and
a different time where those around me have accepted the fact that most lie and truth is beyond
imagination. In your world Kit ones given word was not to be questioned an would not trade for
anything but those days are long gone.
Let us continue on just a little further then you will have the full understanding of where I
stand on this situation. When I ask Sal who was actually me in a previous life so you fully
understand every part of this story. I have ask Sal to leave something that I can find one hundred
and fifty years later which turns out to be a real problem, just a minute Steve let me continue just
a little further then we can all get involved but I want you to have all the information. I can step
back as often as I want to and talk with Sal and my thinking is if that and he puts something for
me to find someone says why didn’t you have him put something or another there for you and I
say just a minute go back have him put it there and then dig again and show the very thing someone
ask to find. You see what I am saying I could have him burry or hid something find it hide
something else and get that also it would be like handing forward something from the past. Who
could possibly doubt that I was communicating with the past?
OK now you can have your turn Steve what have you got on mind? Well Verl if you were
to step back and have Sal put something for you to find why can’t you step forward and have them
hand you something the same way? If we continue this far enough we could put those at the end
of time in touch with those in the very beginning and do away with a lot of the pain in between.
Yes Mr. Newton? From what I am hearing the very thing that made me famous and in return is
the reason you picked me out of millions of others would be of no value because in the end if those
at the beginning could have gave answerers to those in the beginning Adam would not have eaten
the apple. Mother Teresa did not the lord give those at the beginning answers through his bible
the same as we are talking about right now? Yes he did that very thing and it has been read and
put aside just the same.
We are not here to decide the fate of the world we are here to solve a very simple problem
that by myself I can not solve. How do I have Sal hid something for me to find? Yes Albert? First
thing first have you actually watched when he put this object away where it was not where you
told him but what I am saying is did you stay and see what he did with his eyes so you knew the
exact spot and what he saw? Things could change just as you have suggested however it should
be looked at threw both sets of eyes. Have you ever used a mountain or a statue that he can place
it right in one spot and you know exactly where that was. I had him hide something under an
Indian head in Kansas and it was not there or if it was the head of the mountain had feel before I
got there to find it but as to looking through his eyes when he hid it how could I not look through
his eyes if they were in fact my eyes at the time? Sorry jump right past me.
Alexander I have not heard from you and would like to know what you are thinking about
on this subject? As I hear what you are facing I can see that thing would change more in the year
two thousand than they would have in the year fifteen hundred B.C. because of the modern
equipment and mans never ending need to make changes more today than in the beginning. How
ever many of my experiments had to deal with that which I understood and I always tried to keep
only one problem at a time on the bench. So using this type of thinking we must first ask ourselves
what is most likely not to be changed over time?
A famous person statue says Sir Isaac Newton, not true says Einstein because famous for
one time is not for another take Hitler for example greatest leader of all time but not important
enough to stand the test of time. How about a church says Mother Teresa? Newton says look
what happened in Rome didn’t help there. Kit Carson says how about you go to a very high pass
that is made of rock and is to steep to be of a value in most times. With the power of the atom it
could be changed in a heart beat if someone were to want it to be so Einstein says. Better than in
the valley Newton says because as I have proven it will come down.
All in all I think this has been a very enlighten lesson of which I shall return and see if I
can make do with what we have talked about here and I shall endeavor to have Sal hide something
high in the Rockies.
Thank you all for attending and may see you again and with that I turned went through the
door and up the steps and back into the world as I knew it.

 

Chapter Twenty-Nine
Where have you been Anna? Down to the high school I heard they have a teacher who has
spent a lot of time studying hypnosis and I wanted to ask her a few question regarding this subject
because you seem to know so much about it and I have very little knowledge or experience dealing
with this. I have never talked with anyone on this subject in my hole life and now here I am
married with a guy who has two lives one with me and another with himself so to speak. I would
like to be able to add a little something to all of this and I just thought that if I were to talk with
someone who has any thing they can add to this I would like to hear it. Well what did you learn?
I was amazed that she had virtually the same out look on this as you do and I was really tempted
to tell her about your communication with Sal but had second thoughts on it for fear of what she
may have thought. Well Anna I will tell you I have never heard or ever read of anyone doing this
but that means nothing what so ever because I know I have so because they haven’t don’t make it
so. Verl I told her of you going into a deep trans. And talking with people in this room and she
has heard of this and she has meet people who have done this but she brought up and interesting
point; Why did you invite Kit Carson into that room? You are referring to the fact that those others
were such noted people and Kit was not known for his thinking right? Exactly that what possessed
you to have him there? I have to admit it was a real bonus that I had not thought of but gave me a
lot of food for thought. My main reason to invite him was that I knew for a fact he had been over
many high mountain passes and traveled most of the Rocky Mountains and I was expecting him
to tell me of a cave or a place to look for to hide this stuff and when he brought out the story of the
Indians having done this and was like an every day type of thing with them it really through me
for a loop. When he said it I knew for a fact that he was right because I had read about it and it
didn’t seem to register to me. Kind of like waking up to an alarm clock and knowing it has been
ringing for quite a while but somehow just didn’t reach the brain. He told of his experiences and
when he did I knew I had read about them many of times in fact when I wanted to know for sure
if what I was doing you remember I copied the Indians and went up on that mountain alone and it
worked for me just as it did for them over a hundred years ago. Now I find that what I am doing
is not that much different than what they had been doing for years and years. It is amazing to me
what they did and believed was so controversial years ago and now it seems to be coming into
right into my thinking process.
Stop to think about some of the stuff they did then like for instance chanting while playing
the drums. How many stories have you read where they played the drums and by all information
we can learn they were chanting something over and over while playing the same beat of the drum
over and over. There is no way in this world that it was any different than what those down at the
church say when they want as many as possible to say a prayer for something. The Indians had
many people bounding drums and doing the same thing as what is ask of those in prayer. They
were said to be savages and had no education at all yet they talked to their sprits world just as I am
talking with Sal. What is the difference in what we are doing except I do it in my head and have
no out word emotion to show and they we very verbal and in parts and yet when it came right
down to it they spent several days fasting then went off all by them selves and was said to visit
with the spirit world. Kind of scary when you stop to think about it because the early ones like Kit
Carson actually believed them they just didn’t tell family and friends that they believed them. So
I felt very lucky to have brought Kit into the group and it turned out to be a very good choice. I
made a mistake in thinking that Steve Jobs would add to this but he was out of his realm here as
smart as a whip in his own subject but like most very educated people they have a very narrow
thought process. In order to be very good in one subject a person must study and study that subject
and he has not gotten time to learn other things that has nothing to do with what interests him.
Two hundred years ago we had to learn many subjects and the process we used to get to a
conclusion was what they were trying to teach us. That does not even play into today’s class rooms
because a computer does it for them and if you ask most students what a current bush is they would
look at the word and say it is what you plug a computer in to get electricity to run it. They are not
dumb they just have a different history as to what makes the world go around. Trying to say this
is kind of tuff Anna but what I am really trying to say is how can something this different from
local teachings possibly be accepted in today’s world? Those Indians never doubted one minute
that what they were told was true so when they went out into the woods to talk to the spirit world
they didn’t doubt the spirit world their only doubt was in themselves and they went back and went
through a cleaning process until they did make contact and those that heard of it never doubted but
what it did happen. That was the norm then and today I am trying to prove what was taken for
granted years ago.
I have got to digest some of this for a few days then I will try to figure out how to prove
once and for all that it is all true. Perhaps I should have ask him if he knew of a place specific that
I could use. I may have to go back and ask him a few questions and maybe get other to input on
the exact location.
Tell me something can you go as far back as you want with no limitations? I believe this
is even answered in the bible that a man can do what ever his mind limits him to. The lord said if
a man wanted to move a mountain if he wanted he could do it. Of course I am not one to recite
the bible but I am pretty sure its meaning is as I have said. Any way in answer to your question I
have never tried to go beyond several life times and I have never had a reason to search things like
this. I would be at a loss to try and find something that did not involve me personally but I don’t
know why I feel that way it is just something in me that limits me. Like I don’t believe I should
go back and find the Lost Dutchman Mine or where the Spaniards concealed their gold. I just feel
that was not what God had in mind when he allowed me to study the past. Are you saying you
believe this is a gift gave to you? No Anna I don’t believe such a thing I believe we all have this
ability and anyone who puts their mind to it can do anything I am doing. In order to use it though
I do believe if I should use it to harm another or if I should use it for personal gain I would loose
the ability to do what I do. It is not a gift in as much as you are refiring to it is a gift in the fact
that I believe God gave us an unusual amount of knowledge and what we do with it is up to us.
How an atheist would take this I have no idea but I believe he was gave the same ability as I was.
Where does this thing go to Verl what is to become of all of this? Anna I truly think that if I were
not to do this my deity would not allow it to happen and I would be denied the ability so for now
I would just like to prove to the world that we are gave a mind, brain or intelligence beyond what
we are using and this is my way of showing the world. Had I gone on to school and became a
doctor of philosophy I may have had a chance of someone believing me as it is if the doctor of
philosophy said he this is not possible they would believe him and not me. People tend to bow so
to speak to those that study from a book the same way you doubted Kit Carson because he learned
outside of a formal school. I know for a fact that there are a lot of things in this world more
important than going to school. The main reason for going to school is to get a piece of paper
which will lead to a job that will pay ones way better than most. We tend to see and follow those
that continue to push their beliefs in our heads. Look at that Television right now the President is
speaking and telling that the other Side is the reason we are in the shape our country is in and the
other Side is saying the same thing. Nobody stops and says, “hey they are both right lets get rid
of both of them”. No we are like a pig in a barn yard we keep eating what they give us just because
it is the best in the pen we are in and nobody stops to think that we have the whole barn yard and
don’t have to eat from either trough. Two forms of voting Democrat and Republican and because
it was always this way we just keep doing the same thing over and over if we would stand up and
say screw you we are done with following we the people don’t have to take sides we can do better
than this.
Maybe just maybe my little bitty part in all this can make a difference and someone will
finally come to their senses and realize we not limited with what we are told by those that know
no more than we do. Anna there is so much out there that we don’t understand that we can study
forever and never touch it all. You can’t name a subject that has a bottom line meaning there is
no more to learn on that subject. So if I can just create a little doubt in follow the leader I just may
be able to bring Gods intention back to today’s world. I may have to go back to the table in my
little room and ask more questions before going back and talking with Sal but I feel that anything
less would not be proof enough to stand before the critics.
Verl I have to admire your tireless pursuit of this but where it will end causes me to have a
bad feeling that I just can’t seem to shake. Well Anna there is another way to look at this each one
of us has been put here on earth for a reason yours may be just to keep my feet in reality but if my
every thought is toward this goal it is hard for me to believe this is not my purpose. I have
considered writing a book about this but my ability to write is microscopic in every way so this
story will only become know if I can accomplish my goal as I see it and with out Gods will it will
never be told anyway. The least I can do is fix supper so you just keep a positive outlook and we
will see what happens.

 

Chapter Thirty
Hold up there a minute Sal I would like to talk with you. Why should I stop? Your not the
one riding and trying to stay in the saddle I am. Well I know I can learn more from you when you
are laying down than setting up. Must be the brain is leaning to one side more when you are
upright and can’t get around it like you should. Verl you make fun of me and I am you and you
are me there for you are making fun of yourself. Sal that was just about the stupidest statement I
have ever heard you better get down off of the horse and lay flat on your back and see if you can
connect the rusty brain waves together. Well Verl I wouldn’t do this for just anybody but because
I have a definite resonance with you I will endeavor to full fill your wishes. Where did you ever
learn the word resonance? Matters not my book learning friend just you worry about guarding
your self and I will guide you. Enough of the bull tell me where are you Sal? I am setting on
Cherry Creek watching a bunch of mad fellows fight over who has the right to work this area.
What do you mean work it? Well when you pan for gold it is called work and I promise you that
had you ever spent a day bent over at the waste with your feet in the cold water you would know
what work is. After you try to stand up and the back of your knees have not had blood for hours
you can’t feel them and most end up in pain most of their lives after spending a few weeks working
a claim as they say.
Is there any there that knows this county very well? Would be hard pressed to get an
answer from anyone on that type of thing they don’t want to talk about where they are from and
what they are doing here. Verl these people just don’t want to share any information they don’t
have to. I have watched three gun fights in the last 24 hours and four men are dead and less words
were spoken that what you just said. When you turn to a man and ask if he has been somewhere
he immediately thinks that you are trying to tie him to some murder or robbery and he will not
raise to the question. The other night a guy at the camp fire ask another fellow if that was his horse
and the first guy said yes and was dead before he hardly got the yes out of his mouth. Other guy
wanted the horse and I just imagine he just wanted to know the owner so he wouldn’t have to
explain later. You just don’t go around asking questions and you sure don’t answer em. If you
were to ask a guy if the claim he was working was his you better be ready to fill your hand because
that is a loaded question in any camp. What if you needed to know something real bad how could
you ask with out getting your head shot off? Might start off with “if a guy was from out of town
and he really needed a bath where would he go?” That tells him you want to know something and
will go to the barber to learn it if necessary. He may or may not answer you but he knows you are
riding the fence so that is usually safe.
Verl you can’t in any way understand what is going on here at this time. If I were not here
and looking with my own eyes I would not believe this there has to be over a hundred men a day
coming from all directions hunting gold and silver. I am not talking about those that are here or
have been I am talking about new one. When I left the ranch in Kansas I was one of several that
rolled up their bedding and was heading out. Old man Lentford said if everyone left together he
would be hung out to dry by the Indians in two weeks. Only thing that stopped the problem was
that so many men were coming through the ranch everyday heading for Cherry Creek that more
guns were available every night than if he had a full crew. Could have made a fortune just in grub
to those on the road. Damnedest thing you ever saw.
Sal have you got any idea how long it would take you to get on top of that first mountain
right there in front of us? Now that is something not to bad to ask because they would know I am
on my way there not coming from there so I can find out but I would figure it could be done in a
day or two. Don’t have to worry about having enough to eat there are jobs available everywhere
you turn and they will give you a weeks pay in advance if you will sing on to help did a ditch that
will provide water to a mine over in another canyon.
I will be back and check with you but would like to learn about this area. Right on Cowboy
hurry back and bring a case of dynamite. So long Sal.
Well that didn’t do much good maybe I should go back and talk with Kit Carson again.
Get this pillow comfy and three deep breaths and down the stairs I go open the door and hello Kit
got a few questions for you today. No problem go ahead anything I can do to help will be my
pleasure. I have explained to you about Sal hiding something and I have him over here by Denver
which you may not even know where it is do you? Is that on Cherry Creek on the Eastern slope
of the Rockies? Yep! That’s it do you know the area well enough to give a couple of suggestions?
Well to begin with I think I would go right up to one of those high mountain peaks and get above
the rock that has slid down from it and will continue to fall and burry anything laying below so
first find a tall cliff then find one that has a cliff below a cliff so the rocks from the top one has to
spill over the one below it so it can’t build up and you could hide something at the base of the base
of the tallest one and probably get away with that. I think I understand what you just said there
where two cliffs one about the other you go the shelve above the lower and that is the self you are
talking about? Yes that would be a good place the only problem would be trying to dig down in
the sold rock so maybe you could find a crack in the base of the top one and then cover it so it
would not show. Sounds like a plan to me can’t find anything to beat that so long I will be in
touch. So long Verl stay out of the squaw bushes.
Well that was so so now let me think who else could give me something to go on. How
about a miner from that area must be someone who knew about that area and got around a lot.
Makes me wonder where I can’t think of someone who would know off bat could I just relax and
return to 1860 in this area and just stand on the street and listen to people as they walk by? I have
never tried to just listen in on conversations with out having someone in particular to talk with.
Let me lean back and just go into a deep restful stage and see if I can hear people talking.
I would like to just stand on a corner of fifteenth and Larimer streets in Denver Colorado
and watch and listen to the conversations and people walk by in the summer of 1860. I will now
just relax and enjoy the summer sun shine and listen to the people talk. I am now in Colorado
1860 in the summer enjoying the sunshine. Nothing must be something is wrong I can’t see or
hear anyone. This is not as I expected I will now go back up the stairs and return to a full awaken
relaxed and comfortable afternoon. As I came to Anna walked into the room and was looking at
me kind of strange. What seems to be the problem Anna? You had an out word appearance of not
being in the room but on the same time you did not seem to be as relaxed as normal did you have
a bad time on this trip? Well I tried to just go to Denver in 1960 and not see anyone in particular
just be there and kind of like hang out but it didn’t work. Have you ever tried to do this before?
No Anna I haven’t but it seems to make sense to be able to watch and listen. First thing that comes
to my mind Verl is if you could do this you could stand over the President of the United States
shoulder and listen as he gives instructions to someone and you would have information nobody
else would have. I don’t think that has anything to do with rather I can do this or not it just didn’t
happen to work this time which has nothing to do with rather it can be done or not. Only thing
until I finish with this situation with Sal I am not about to try to push this further than I have to. I
have considered going into the future and then I would know things that could possibly help here
but I think I have enough on my plate right now.
Just need more input as to where Sal can place an object that I can recover today. Doesn’t
seem to be so tuff on the outside but sure turning out to be ruff. Did you try a church or mission
as has been expressed. No I had not but that should be my next step thank you. Well Anna
checking the first church in Denver was a Methodist Church and it is no longer standing so we can
cross that off. History says a Rev. William Bradford was the minister and the church was erected
on the corner of 14th and Arapahoe. Sense it is no longer there it makes no difference rather I talk
to Sal about it or not.
Next would be someone who could perhaps tell of a cave or such that may be used. Found
Jerry Smith around 1860 and think I will take a few minutes and see what he has to say about this
hole thing. After spending the normal time getting into position and relaxing and going through
my process of self control I stand before Jerry Smith. Hi Jerry my name is Verl and I have ask to
meet with you because I am told that you know the Denver Colorado area very well and have been
here for several years. Well no that is not true I know the area is true but not many of us have been
here for years. I have many friends here and no one has been here more than three or four years
we are all fairly new to the area. What I am getting at is I have a lot of questions about this area
and the first one would be caves do you know of many caves around here? Yes depending on what
you call around here with in a weeks ride you can get to many and I mean many caves of different
sizes and what ever. You have to understand that this country is full of prospectors and they are
making caves as fast as swat a fly. It would not matter which way you went from here except
maybe East but all over these mountains are many natural caves and those have all ready been dug
through and every time a new guy moves in he does some more digging so there is no in to it.
How about cliff’s of any size know of any? Yes those are all up toward the high peaks and you
can easily find those because they show out for so far. If I were to want to find one about how far
would I have to ride to get to some? Anywhere from ten miles on just help yourself. Nobody is
mining those? Not much use in fighting that high mountain when you can find all the gold and
silver you want right down on the valley floor. If that is why you want them you are wasting your
time. No Jerry that is not what I have in mind but I would especially like to find a cliff above a
cliff. Go up into the high country and you can find many that will amaze you in that there could
be five in a row getting higher and higher as you go up the mountain, very impressive to stand up
on top and look out over the country. This is truly Gods country and we all know it. So what you
are saying it would not take a guide to find these cliff’s? No just take the main road heading West
out of here and head like you are going to Utah and you can’t miss em. Thanks Jerry I appreciate
the information. No problem good luck Verl. Thanks and best to you also.

 

Chapter Thirty-One
After all this Anna I really know that I can guide Sal to a spot where he can leave something
and I will be able to find it any time for a long time to come. Have talked with enough that have
convinced me the way to do it is not in a church yard but up on a mountain below a high cliff with
another cliff below it so that the rocks and stuff that sluff off of the high cliff bounces off of the
cliff below and if you could have several in a row one above the other that would even be better.
So tomorrow I am going to meet with Sal and have him head up into the high country and take
something that we can for sure prove he left it for me. I will wait for him to find someone who
can write and have them make something in stone that the weather will not destroy and will last
for years. Sounds like a good plan Verl and I will certainly be glad to see this over with it has got
to the point of become ridicules even the neighbors have started to talking about rather you have
tipped over the edge of sanity or not. They ask me and I truly can’t tell them you are working with
a full deck anymore. Well that’s one hell of a thing for a guys wife to tell him if ever there was.
Don’t you think this is worth proving Anna? I have to admit that at first I thought it was a great
idea but as it keep going and going and going it got to the point I wasn’t sure if it mattered or not
just give me back my husband and lets get on with the world. Well Anna I promise tomorrow is
the last day of this if I can’t prove what I am saying to the world I will forget the whole thing and
we will take two months and just go fishing or something. All right Verl I am going to hold you
to that so it better work tomorrow.
All right Sal we have a plan and first need you to find someone who can carve a letter in
stone so we can take it up into the high country and burry it. Verl you want me to take a large rock
on Pacers back a long with me and go up into the high country? You are crazy as a local weed
bronco with out water. There is no way I am going to take a five hundred pound rock and go up
into the mountains. Who says it has to way 500 lbs? You want a letter written can that be done
on a wooden board? Yes but the board would rot till we would have nothing. With all the stuff
you guys have in your world haven’t they figured out how to take a vacuum like the one you put
your hat on and put something light in it and use that? Yes they have but it is not available in your
time which is what we are talking about. So you admit your head is a vacuum and could be use to
store information if we could figure out how to get it in there. Sal you are a real winner when it
comes to deflating a guys ego but what I need is a little more positive adjustments here. I can only
work with what I have Verl and at this point it looks like we are short of supplies and long on
ideas. Well how would you suggest we leave a message that told of you leaving something to me?
Can’t you just tell em that there is going to be six marbles and four rocks that are square as your
head? Will you stop trying to make fun of me Sal? Well Verl you stand before me as some thing
that is almost impossible to believe wanting something done that is just about as impossible as a
flying horse and it’s hard to not consider that your mother cut your corner of the table off before
you were full grown. Look Sal we have got to head up there today and find a tall cliff that we can
get to and put something and I mean like right now. Damn if you are not just the pushenst cuss in
the country.
Sal is there a reason we can’t go up there right now? Well I can think of several reasons,
one I haven’t been to bed in two days, and two Pacer has not had the saddle off in two days. He
is worn out the same as I am and we have to have a rest and then we have to figure out how I am
going to pay for the grub to take up there. Then if you want some thing else up there we will need
a pack horse because Pacer can’t go straight up and carry it all himself. You have convinced me
Sal go take care of what you have to do and I will check back in a few days with you. Now you
are starting to make sense go get drunk or something and when you sober up look me up. Good
radiance till we meet again.
Its a good thing that I can just set here and wait ten minutes and then go back but this time
I will give him two days to get stuff together and we will go it again.
All right Sal have you gotten the rest necessary to make you happy? Ya I have gotten a
couple of good nights rest and except for having to shoot a guy for trying to steal Pacer I have not
had to do much. What do you mean tried to steal Pacer? Well a damn fool went into his stall and
he was behind my room in a shed and I heard the barn door rattling the other night and the guy had
went in and tried to get Pacer to back out of the stall we by the time I got there it was only proper
to shot the guy because his insides were strung all over the stall and up the barn door so I did him
a favor and just shot him. You mean no body would say anything about you shooting this guy?
Hell wasn’t a guy around that wouldn’t have done the same thing for him. Some guys are just to
dumb to live so you are doing them a favor in putting em out of there misery.
Can we start today for the mountain or have you got another problem? Yes there is a small
problem I have two dollars to my name and I can’t get what I need with less than forty dollars. So
what are you going to do? Real easy I am going right now into the bar and challenge as many
guys as possible to a shooting match winner take all. What kind of a shooting match? Don’t know
till I get in there and see what they will go along with. Just follow me and you may learn a thing
or two.
Standing in the bar and with a loud voice after shooting twice into the ceiling of the bar Sal
says, “I have came up the trail from Kansas and have heard that this place is full of a bunch of
lilies that blew in off the soft part of a whore house couch and I am suppose to go gentle on any
wagers as to being able to handle a gun out in front in a little competition.” So many guys were
yelling and screaming that you could not hear. Hold it, hold it right there is sounds like there are
several that don’t agree with what I have been told so I will put up twenty dollars here on the bar
and as Sal said that he placed his hand on the bar with two dollars under it and said how many of
you think you can beat me? The yelling and screaming was real so loud you couldn’t hear yourself
think but Sal’s hand was covered with money and before raising his hand he said, “Who is going
to hold this money and make sure who is in this little fun for all?” A guy with the shoulders the
size of a mule stood up and put his hand on Sal’s and says I will keep this honest and how many
are in this and he counted out the money and had eighty two dollars so he says somebody has not
gotten it right and he says I say Sal put his down and now who was next and they went around
until one of the guys admitted he may have put down smaller bills and put up more. When it was
finally tallied up there was two hundred and twenty dollars in the pot. Walking outside Sal had a
guy walk across the street and put eleven whisky bottles on the far side on the side walk. The
bottles were about one hundred and fifty feet away. Now Sal says we are going to get this over
with in a hurry so all of you line up right here beside me. I am number one and so on right on
down to number eleven. Now everyone should be able to see their bottle over there is there any
questions? Ya a guy says I am not sure which one is mine. Will somebody please go over there
and put a number in each bottle so the blind can see which is theirs. The big guy who was holding
the money walked over and moved the bottles so that five were about two feet apart then he moved
them ten feet and put six more. Now can every one see their bottles? Yes everyone said OK now
we want someone to throw a rock up on the roof over there and when it hits the ground everyone
is to go for their bottle and it’s not jus how fast but it has to be broken. A tall drink of water
stepped out and picked up a rock and everyone lined up and the crowd started to yelling and
screaming and up went the rock and it rolled down and one guy went to fast but he missed his
bottle anyway. Sal drew and fired and his was the only bottle to break. Well guess you guys just
don’t have what it takes but thanks just the same and he reached over and took the money. As he
turned to go two others wanted a rematch but Sal says no sense in making it worse but if you want
I will put up all that is here for one more try. They turned that down and Sal walked around the
corner and handed a fellow with a rifle twenty dollars and said good shooting Tom. Sal you mean
to tell me you took advantage of all those guys? Of course I did how else did you think I was
going to get that pack horse and supplies? We have got to get out of here before someone figures
out how I did it.
We have to step over to the undertakers and see if he is finished with the head stone? Head
stone what are you talking about? Well how many people do you think can read or write in this
little town and of those how many do you think can write on a stone? Well I’ll be damn Sal you
are one bright light if there ever was one. It’s about time you recognized a real talent when you
saw it. Just remember that as you use those derogatory remarks that come so handy to you.
Got the pack horse loaded and have enough grub to last a week along with an extra snip or
two just to make your personality easier to take Verl. Lets be on the way how are you going to
keep up Verl can you kind of float along or do you just jump from thorn bush to thorn bush? Well
one thing for damn sure I don’t have to worry about any rose bushes that for sure. Sounds like
you have been eating bitter bush don’t let it get to you Verl you will pull through.
Can you see that highest peak up there Sal? That should be a perfect one if we can get
around the mountain and back to this with out endangering the animals. Look there Verl just like
a baby in your arms can’t get any easier than this all I have to do is turn the stone upside down and
throw a little dirt over it and no one will ever suspect what we have here. Now just let me look at
it one more time. I will read it to you Sal. The date of July 10, 1860 is on top and below that is
printed. Salmon Oldmire Smith leaves this stone as proof of his talking and planing with Verl K
who will find this in the year 2012. Salmon will die this year and knows he will appear as Verl in
that year. Wow that should do it if ever there was kind of like to know what the guy thought when
he was making this. Well I had to tell him it was a joke we were making on a bunch of city slickers
from San Francisco. Sal I have to say this is very impressive and I hate to leave you but it looks
like this is the end of the line for us. Good luck Verl and we will join in the future. Bye Sal and
be careful going down of this mountain but don’t worry you have a few days left. Thanks but
nothing will change now. Bye Verl.
Climbing back up the steps and shaking my head I find myself in the front room all by
myself and not a sole to around. As I start to raise out of the chair there is a loud wind seeming to
come from everywhere at the same time and yet nothing is moving on the coffee table or end tables
in the living room. The wind seems to be very loud and kind of eerie if ever it was. The I hear
this voice loud and clear, “What you are about to hear will change your life forever”.

The End
[Base Plot Point]
* * * *
* * * *